Tektronix Wheelchair WFM 601A User Manual

User Manual  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M  
Serial Digital Component Waveform Monitors  
071-0103-01  
This document supports firmware version 1.00  
and above.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARRANTY  
Tektronix warrants that the products that it manufactures and sells will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for  
a period of three (3) years from the date of shipment. If a product proves defective during this warranty period, Tektronix, at  
its option, either will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor, or will provide a replacement in  
exchange for the defective product.  
In order to obtain service under this warranty, Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the  
warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service. Customer shall be responsible for packaging  
and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix, with shipping charges prepaid. Tektronix  
shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within the country in which the Tektronix  
service center is located. Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges, duties, taxes, and any other charges  
for products returned to any other locations.  
This warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate maintenance  
and care. Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a) to repair damage resulting from attempts  
by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install, repair or service the product; b) to repair damage resulting from  
improper use or connection to incompatible equipment; c) to repair any damage or malfunction caused by the use of  
non-Tektronix supplies; or d) to service a product that has been modified or integrated with other products when the effect of  
such modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product.  
THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR  
IMPLIED. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TEKTRONIX’ RESPONSIBILITY TO  
REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO  
THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE  
LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE  
OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH  
DAMAGES.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Assurance  
If you have not already purchased Service Assurance for this product, you may do so at any time during the product’s  
warranty period. Service Assurance provides Repair Protection and Calibration Services to meet your needs.  
Repair Protection extends priority repair services beyond the product’s warranty period; you may purchase up to three years  
of Repair Protection.  
Calibration Services provide annual calibration of your product, standards compliance and required audit documentation,  
recall assurance, and reminder notification of scheduled calibration. Coverage begins upon registration; you may purchase up  
to five years of Calibration Services.  
Service Assurance Advantages  
H Priced well below the cost of a single repair or calibration  
H Avoid delays for service by eliminating the need for separate purchase authorizations from your company  
H Eliminates unexpected service expenses  
For Information and Ordering  
For more information or to order Service Assurance, contact your Tektronix representative and provide the information  
below. Service Assurance may not be available in locations outside the United States of America.  
Name  
VISA or Master Card number and expiration  
date or purchase order number  
Repair Protection (1,2, or 3 years)  
Calibration Services (1,2,3,4, or 5 years)  
Instrument model and serial number  
Instrument purchase date  
Company  
Address  
City, State, Postal code  
Country  
Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
General Safety Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
ix  
xi  
Getting Started  
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1–1  
1–1  
1–2  
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Included Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Hardware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Connecting Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Installing the Waveform Monitor in a Serial Video System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1–5  
1–5  
1–5  
1–11  
1–12  
Functional Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Required Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Initial Equipment Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Functional Check Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1–15  
1–15  
1–16  
1–17  
Operating Basics  
Reference  
Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Front Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Using the Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Rear Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2–1  
2–1  
2–5  
2–6  
Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Audio Display (WFM 601A Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Bowtie Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Configure Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
CRT Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Digital List (WFM 601M Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Digital Waveform (WFM 601M Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Eye Display (WFM 601E and WFM 601M Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Filter Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Gain Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Gamut Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Graticule Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Jitter Measurement Display (WFM 601M Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Line Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Multiple Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Parade Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Picture Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Ref Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3–1  
3–1  
3–5  
3–7  
3–8  
3–12  
3–13  
3–14  
3–16  
3–19  
3–27  
3–28  
3–29  
3–34  
3–37  
3–39  
3–41  
3–41  
3–42  
3–43  
3–44  
i
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Serial Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Vector Display Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Video In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Waveform Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3–44  
3–52  
3–53  
3–58  
3–58  
Appendices  
Appendix A: Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
A–1  
Appendix B: Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
RS–232 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Remote Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
B–1  
B–1  
B–1  
Appendix C: Remote Command Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
C–1  
Cable Measurement Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
SLM:CABle <B8281 | B1694 | B1505> (WFM 601E and WFM 601M Only) .  
SLM:SOURCE? (WFM 601E and WFM 601M Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
SLM:RCVR? (WFM 601E and WFM 601M Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
SLM:LEVEL? (WFM 601E and WFM 601M Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
SLM:LENGTH? (WFM 601E and WFM 601M Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
C–3  
C–3  
C–4  
C–4  
C–5  
C–5  
Configuration Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
REFErence: MODE <INT | EXT> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
ARROWhead:LIMIT:PAL <MV_700 | MV_950> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
ARROWhead:LIMIT:NTSC <IRE_100 | IRE_110 | IRE_120 | IRE_131> . . . .  
ARROWhead:FORMat <NTSC | PAL | AUTO> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
GAMut:GRATicule <ARROWhead | DIAmond> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
GAMut:ALarm:TRIGger <NONE | CMPST | RGB | BOTH> . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
GAMut:ALarm:DISPlay <SCRN | PICT | BOTH> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
STANDard <LINES_525 | LINES_625 | AUTO> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
VECtor:BARS <B100 | B75> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
VECtor:GRATicule <LTNG | VECtor> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
SERial:MENU <STATUS | FORM | CABLE> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
SERial:DISPlay <RGB | YPbPr> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
SERial:MONitor <GBR | YPbPr> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
SERial:EAVSAV <PASS | STRIP> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
SERial:ALarm:<error type> <alarm setting> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
UIMENU:<command> <options> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
C–6  
C–6  
C–7  
C–7  
C–8  
C–8  
C–9  
C–9  
C–10  
C–10  
C–11  
C–11  
C–12  
C–12  
C–13  
C–13  
C–14  
Cursor Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–16  
CURsor:SELect <VOLT | TIME | VOLT_TIME | MARK | NONE> . . . . . . . . .  
CURsor:CONTROL <VOLT | TIME> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
MC:<ONE | TWO | THREE> <marker position> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
<VC | TC>:<ONE | TWO> <voltage level | timing range> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
<TC | VC>:TRACK <ON | OFF> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
C–16  
C–17  
C–17  
C–18  
C–19  
Digital Waveform and Digital List Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–20  
DGTL? (WFM 601M Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
DGTL:REGion? (WFM 601M Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
DGTL:DATA? (WFM 601M Only)  
DGTL:DATA:V#? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
DGTL:VDATA? (WFM 601M Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
DGTL:VIDmode <VIDEO | DATA> (WFM 601M Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
DGTL:FReeze <ON | OFF> (WFM 601M Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
DGTL:BASE <HEX | DECIMAL | BINARY> (WFM 601M Only) . . . . . . . . .  
C–20  
C–21  
C–21  
C–22  
C–23  
C–23  
C–24  
ii  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–25  
DISPlay:SINGLE <display mode> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
DISPlay:INTENSITY:<display mode>:<line select mode> <intensity> . . . . . .  
DISPlay:INTENSITY:READ <intensity> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
DISPlay:INTENSITY:AUDIO <intensity> (WFM 601A Only) . . . . . . . . . . . .  
DISPlay:PIXC <contrast range> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
DISPlay:PIXB <blackness range> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
DISPlay:TRACEROT <tracerotate> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
DISPlay:SCALEillum <scale> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
DISPlay:FOCUS:<line select mode> <range> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
C–25  
C–26  
C–27  
C–28  
C–28  
C–28  
C–29  
C–29  
C–30  
Error Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–31  
ESR? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
ALLEV? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
C–31  
C–31  
Eye Pattern Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–33  
EYe:DISPlay < FLAT | EQEYE> (WFM 601M Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
EYe:MODE <OVERLAY | EYE10> (WFM 601E and WFM 601M Only) . . . .  
EYe:CLOckhpf <E10HZ | E100HZ | E1000HZ> (WFM 601E and  
C–33  
C–33  
WFM 601M Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
C–34  
Gain Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–35  
GAIN:AUDIO <DBU0 | DBU4 | DBU8 | DBU12> (WFM 601A Only) . . . . .  
GAIN:W_V_STATE <x1 | x5 | x10> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
GAIN:<WFM | VEC>:VAR:STATE <ON | OFF> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
GAIN:<WFM | VEC>:VAR:VALUE <gain> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
GAIN:LTNG:VAR:<VERT | HORZ>:STATE <ON | OFF> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
GAIN:LTNG:VAR:<VERT | HORZ>:VALUE <gain> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
C–35  
C–35  
C–36  
C–36  
C–37  
C–37  
Input Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–38  
INput:SOUrce <SERIALA | SERIALB> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
INput:CHANnel <CH1 | CH2 | CH3> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
INput:PBPROFFSet <MV_0 | MV_350> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
C–38  
C–39  
C–39  
Jitter Measurement Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–40  
JITter:HPFILter <J10HZ | J1000HZ | J10KHZ | J100KHZ> (WFM 601M Only)  
JITter:UNITS <SEC | UI | OFF> (WFM 601M Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
JITter:<ALIGNMENT | TIMING >? (WFM 601M Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
C–40  
C–40  
C–41  
Line Select Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–42  
LINESelect:<command> <options> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
C–42  
Position Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–44  
POSition:VERTical:<display mode> <range>  
POSition:HORZ:<display mode> <range> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
C–44  
Preset Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–46  
PREset:REcall <PRESETn | FACTORY > . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
PREset:STORE <PRESETn> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
PREset:NAMES:<PRESETn> “any string” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
C–46  
C–46  
C–47  
Sweep Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–48  
SWEEP:TIMING <ONEL | TWOL | ONEF | TWOF> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
SWEEP:TIMING <ONEL | ONEF> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
SWEEP:MAG <OFF | ON> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
C–48  
C–49  
C–49  
System Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–50  
MENU <FILTer | CURsor | LINESelect | CONFIG | GAIN | CRT | CLear |  
SERial> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
C–50  
iii  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
FILTer <FLAT | DIFF | LP> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
AFC <ON | OFF> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
PORT:ECHO <ON | OFF> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
ROTEST <ON | OFF> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
SNID? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
CALSignal:ENable <OFF | ON> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
C–51  
C–51  
C–52  
C–52  
C–53  
C–53  
Remote Command Processing Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–55  
Appendix D: User Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Cleaning or Replacing the Fan Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Fuse Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Graticule Light Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Replacing the CRT Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
D–1  
D–1  
D–1  
D–2  
D–3  
D–3  
Glossary  
Index  
iv  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
List of Figures  
Figure 1–1: Dimensions of the 1700F00 plain cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1–6  
1–7  
Figure 1–2: 1700F02 portable cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 1–3: Rear view of the waveform monitor in a 1700F02 cabinet  
Figure 1–4: The 1700F05 rack cabinet holds two instruments . . . . . .  
Figure 1–5: 1700F05 cabinet showing utility drawer and blank panel  
Figure 1–6: Monitoring the video bit stream of a serial receiver . . . .  
1–8  
1–9  
1–10  
1–12  
Figure 1–7: Monitoring serial digital signals around  
a routing switcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1–13  
1–14  
Figure 1–8: Eye Pattern display of a termination with good  
return loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 1–9: Eye Pattern display of a termination with poor  
return loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1–14  
1–16  
1–18  
1–19  
1–20  
1–21  
1–22  
1–22  
1–23  
1–24  
1–25  
1–26  
1–26  
2–1  
Figure 1–10: Initial equipment connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 1–11: Initial display in the Waveform display mode . . . . . . . .  
Figure 1–12: Channel 1 of Color bar with CRT adjustments visible .  
Figure 1–13: Eye Pattern display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 1–14: Jitter display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 1–15: Vector display for 100% Color bar signal . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 1–16: Lightning display for 100% Color bar signal . . . . . . . .  
Figure 1–17: Arrowhead gamut display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 1–18: Diamond gamut display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 1–19: Video digital waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 1–20: Data digital waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 1–21: Typical Audio display with small phase error . . . . . . . .  
Figure 2–1: WFM 601M front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 2–2: WFM 601A and WFM 601E front panels . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 2–3: Elements of the waveform monitor menu controls . . . . .  
Figure 2–4: Rear panel of the waveform monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 3–1: A signal from one channel only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 3–2: X and Y signal in phase with equal amplitudes . . . . . . . .  
Figure 3–3: Signals out of phase with equal amplitudes . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 3–4: Signals out of phase with unequal amplitudes . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 3–5: Signals with reverse polarity and equal amplitudes . . . .  
2–2  
2–5  
2–6  
3–1  
3–2  
3–2  
3–3  
3–3  
Figure 3–6: Signals with a phase error of 90 degrees and  
equal amplitudes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3–3  
3–4  
Figure 3–7: Typical Audio display pattern with small phase error . .  
v
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Figure 3–8: Typical Bowtie display on the waveform monitor . . . . . .  
Figure 3–9: Bowtie waveform showing a timing error in CH 3 . . . . .  
Figure 3–10: Bowtie waveform showing gain error in CH 3 . . . . . . . .  
3–5  
3–6  
3–6  
Figure 3–11: Configure menu for WFM/VEC showing  
the selection knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3–8  
3–9  
Figure 3–12: Map of functions available in the Configure menu . . . .  
Figure 3–13: Example of the Digital List display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 3–14: Data List display mode in the Video mode . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 3–15: Digital Waveform display in the VIDEO mode . . . . . . .  
Figure 3–16: Digital Waveform display in DATA mode . . . . . . . . . . .  
3–14  
3–15  
3–16  
3–17  
Figure 3–17: Digital Waveform display showing X5 gain on CH 1 (Y)  
waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3–18  
3–20  
3–21  
3–22  
Figure 3–18: Overlay Eye display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 3–19: 10-EYE triggered display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 3–20: Connections for measuring a serial source . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 3–21: Timing Cursors alignment for measuring 20–80%  
rise time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3–24  
3–29  
3–30  
3–31  
3–34  
3–35  
3–37  
Figure 3–22: Construction of the Diamond display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 3–23: Out-of-gamut signals on a Diamond display . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 3–24: NTSC and PAL Arrowhead gamut displays . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 3–25: Waveform measurement graticule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 3–26: Graticule for K-factor measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 3–27: Example of the Jitter display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 3–28: Parade display of YPbPr shown in Line Select mode  
(15H only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3–40  
3–41  
3–42  
3–45  
3–47  
3–48  
3–49  
3–50  
3–53  
3–54  
3–55  
3–56  
B–1  
Figure 3–29: Parade display of Y and Pb signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 3–30: Example of the Picture display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 3–31: Serial STATUS display for firmware V2.X . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 3–32: Serial STATUS display for firmware V1.X . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 3–33: Serial format display showing the FORMAT screen . . .  
Figure 3–34: Serial format display showing the Cable screen . . . . . .  
Figure 3–35: Connection for point-to-point error measurements . . .  
Figure 3–36: Vector display relationship of the Pr and Pb signals . . .  
Figure 3–37: Vector display graticule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 3–38: Construction of the Lightning display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 3–39: Lightning graticule showing interchannel timing errors  
Figure B–1: Pin assignments for the RS-232 connector . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure B–2: Pin assignments for the REMOTE connector . . . . . . . .  
Figure D–1: Graticule light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
B–2  
D–2  
vi  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
List of Tables  
Table 3–1: List of measured and actual rise times for the  
waveform monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table A–1: Electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table A–2: CRT display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table A–3: AC power source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table A–4: Environmental characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table A–5: Physical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3–25  
A–1  
A–8  
A–9  
A–9  
A–9  
Table A–6: Safety standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–10  
Table A–7: Safety certification compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–10  
Table A–8: Certifications and compliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–11  
Table B–1: Remote connector pin assignments and functions . . . . . .  
Table C–1: Symbols used in this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
B–2  
C–1  
Table C–2: SERial:ALarm: commands and options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–14  
Table C–3: UIMENU: commands and options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–15  
Table C–4: Voltage and Timing Cursor positioning commands  
and options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–18  
Table C–5: Voltage and Timing Cursor tracking commands and  
options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–19  
Table C–6: DISPLay:SINGLE commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–25  
Table C–7: DISPlay:INTENSITY command options . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–27  
Table C–8: DISPLay:FOCUS command options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–30  
Table C–9: Typical ALLEV? responses to detected system errors. . . C–32  
Table C–10: LINESelect: commands and options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–42  
Table C–11: POSition:VERTical commands and options . . . . . . . . . C–45  
Table C–12: POSition:HORZ commands and options . . . . . . . . . . . . C–45  
Table C–13: FILTer command options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–51  
vii  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
viii  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Safety Summary  
Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to  
this product or any products connected to it.  
Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures.  
To avoid potential hazards, use this product only as specified.  
Injury Precautions  
Use Proper Power Cord. To avoid fire hazard, use only the power cord specified  
for this product.  
Avoid Electric Overload. To avoid electric shock or fire hazard, do not apply a  
voltage to a terminal that is outside the range specified for that terminal.  
Ground the Product. This product is grounded through the grounding conductor  
of the power cord. To avoid electric shock, the grounding conductor must be  
connected to earth ground. Before making connections to the input or output  
terminals of the product, ensure that the product is properly grounded.  
Do Not Operate Without Covers. To avoid electric shock or fire hazard, do not  
operate this product with covers or panels removed.  
Use Proper Fuse. To avoid fire hazard, use only the fuse type and rating specified  
for this product.  
Do Not Operate in Wet/Damp Conditions. To avoid electric shock, do not operate  
this product in wet or damp conditions.  
Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere. To avoid injury or fire hazard, do not  
operate this product in an explosive atmosphere.  
Product Damage  
Precautions  
Use Proper Power Source. Do not operate this product from a power source that  
applies more than the voltage specified.  
Provide Proper Ventilation. To prevent product overheating, provide proper  
ventilation.  
Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures. If you suspect there is damage to this  
product, have it inspected by qualified service personnel.  
Symbols and Terms  
Terms in this Manual. These terms may appear in this manual:  
WARNING. Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result  
in injury or loss of life.  
ix  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Safety Summary  
CAUTION. Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in  
damage to this product or other property.  
Terms on the Product. These terms may appear on the product:  
DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the  
marking.  
WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the  
marking.  
CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product.  
Symbols on the Product. The following symbols may appear on the product:  
DANGER  
High Voltage  
Protective Ground  
(Earth) Terminal  
ATTENTION  
Refer to Manual  
Double  
Insulated  
Certifications and  
Compliances  
Refer to the specifications section for a listing of certifications and compliances  
that apply to this product.  
x
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preface  
This manual describes the capabilities of the WFM 601A, WFM 601E, and  
WFM 601M Serial Digital Component Waveform Monitors and their features  
and specifications.  
To get started, refer to the first section, Getting Started. This section shows you  
how to install and configure the waveform monitor for use in your operating  
environment. For detailed information about a feature, refer to the third section,  
Reference.  
About This Manual  
This manual is composed of the following sections:  
H
H
H
H
Getting Started provides a product description, installation instructions, and a  
functional check procedure. Standard and optional accessories are also listed.  
Operating Basics briefly describes the front panel controls and rear panel  
connections.  
Reference provides an alphabetized reference for all display modes and  
configurable features of the waveform monitor.  
Appendices provides additional information including the specifications,  
remote control interfaces, and maintenance procedures.  
Related Manuals  
The following related document is also available.  
H
The WFM 601A, WFM 601E, and WFM 601M Service Manual  
(070–9836-XX) describes how to service the waveform monitors. This  
optional manual may be ordered separately.  
Complete and mail the Warranty Reply Card packaged with this manual to ensure  
that you receive notifications of firmware or hardware upgrades.  
xi  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preface  
Contacting Tektronix  
Product  
Support  
For application-oriented questions about a Tektronix measure-  
ment product, call toll free in North America:  
1-800-TEK-WIDE (1-800-835-9433 ext. 2400)  
6:00 a.m. – 5:00 p.m. Pacific time  
Or contact us by e-mail:  
For product support outside of North America, contact your  
local Tektronix distributor or sales office.  
Service  
Support  
Contact your local Tektronix distributor or sales office. Or visit  
our web site for a listing of worldwide service locations.  
http://www.tek.com  
In North America:  
For other  
information 1-800-TEK-WIDE (1-800-835-9433)  
An operator will direct your call.  
To write us Tektronix, Inc.  
P.O. Box 1000  
Wilsonville, OR 97070-1000  
xii  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
This section presents information you need to set up your waveform monitor and  
to check that it is functional. This section contains the following information:  
H
H
H
H
Product Description gives an overview of the product capabilities.  
Accessories lists the standard and optional accessories.  
Installation describes how to set up the waveform monitor for use.  
Functional Check gives a procedure to verify the primary functions of your  
waveform monitor.  
Product Description  
The waveform monitors measure and display 4:2:2 component serial digital  
signals. A waveform monitor displays serial digital signals as the familiar  
component signals, as an Eye pattern, as digital data or in a variety of standard  
measurement modes. Use the EDH (Error Detection and Handling) system and  
the suite of automated checks of the serial digital format to verify data integrity.  
Refer to Appendix A: Specifications for details of the waveform monitor  
performance.  
Features  
The waveform monitors offers the following features:  
H
H
H
H
Two 270 Mbit serial component loop-through inputs  
Digital video standards SMPTE 259M, ITU-R BT.656, and ITU–R BT.601  
RGB and Y-PB-PR display format for 525 and 625 line signals  
Eye Pattern display with Timing and Voltage Cursors on the WFM 601E and  
the WFM 601M  
H
Jitter demodulator with numeric jitter readout and video correlated jitter  
waveform display on the WFM 601M  
H
H
Parade or Waveform display of Y, PB, and PR component signals  
Digital Waveform and Data displays with Data-cursor correlation between  
display modes on the WFM 601M  
H
H
RGB and composite Gamut checks with Diamond and Arrowhead displays  
Field, line, and word (WFM 601M only) select with readout and bright up of  
selected lines on Picture Monitor Out (Y or G Channel)  
1–1  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
H
H
H
H
SMPTE RP-165 standard EDH indicator for presence  
Embedded Audio indentification  
Analog audio Lissajous display on the WFM 601A  
Source signal level meter and cable-length readout on the WFM 601E and  
the WFM 601M  
H
H
H
Lightning and Vector displays  
Reclocked Serial Component Digital output following A/B switching  
Video Reference: Internal Serial Component signal (follows A/B switching)  
or external composite  
Menus  
An expanded feature set is available through the menus. You select menu items  
with multi-use bezel buttons and knobs. When you select a menu item, such as  
Voltage Cursors, on-screen labels show the current function of the bezel buttons  
and knobs.  
Calibrator  
The waveform monitors provide an internal calibrator signal to set both vertical  
and horizontal gain. The calibrator signal is a 700 mV, 100 kHz signal. Press the  
CONFIG button and use the bezel knob to select the Calibrate menu. Press the  
CAL SIG button to turn on the calibrator signal.  
Accessories  
The waveform monitor is shipped with several standard accessories. These  
standard accessories and any optional accessories are listed here.  
Standard Accessories  
The following accessory items are included with this product:  
1
1
1
3
3
2
User Manual, this manual (071-0103–XX)  
Power Cord: United States and Japan only (161–0216–XX)  
Replacement Fuse Cartridge: 3AG, 2A, 250 V, fast-blow (159–0021–00)  
Replacement Graticule Light Bulbs (150–0168–00)  
Replacement Air Filters for Fan (378–0415–00)  
75 W High-frequency, End-line Terminations: 26 dB to 300 MHz  
(011–0163–00)  
1
Smoke Grey CRT Filter, installed on instrument (378–0258–00)  
1–2  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Options  
The following options are available when ordering a waveform monitor.  
Power Cord Options. If you do not specify a power cord option, the waveform  
monitor is shipped with a North American 125 V power cord and one replace-  
ment fuse. The following power cord options are available when purchasing your  
waveform monitor.  
Power cords for use in North America are UL listed and CSA certified. Cords for  
use in areas other than North America are approved by at least one test house  
acceptable in the country to which the product is shipped.  
H
H
H
H
H
Option A1. Power, Universal Europe, 220 V/16 A (Locking Power Cord)  
Option A2. Power, United Kingdom, 240 V/15 A (Power Cord)  
Option A3. Power, Australia, 240 V/10 A (Power Cord)  
Option A4. Power, North America, 250 V/10 A (Power Cord)  
Option A5. Power, Swiss, 240 V/6 A (Power Cord)  
Optional Accessories  
The following items can be ordered with the monitor or purchased through a  
Tektronix field office or distributor. When ordering, include both the name and  
part number (if available) of the option.  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E, and WFM 601M Service Manual. (070-9836-XX) Provides  
module-level troubleshooting information plus information to help identify  
components, such as schematics, component locaters, and a complete parts list.  
Front Panel Cover. The front panel cover protects the display face from damage  
and dust.  
1700F00 Plain Cabinet. This rack mount cabinet is half-rack width, made of  
durable metal and painted silver-gray. Ventilating holes in the top, bottom, and  
sides of the cabinet help dissipate heat.  
1700F02 Carrying Case. This portable cabinet is similar to the 1700F00, but it has  
rubber feet, a carrying handle, a flipstand, and a front cover.  
1700F05 Side-by-Side Rack Adapter. The 1700F05 allows you to mount two  
half-rack width instruments in a standard 19-inch rack.  
1–3  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
1700F06 Blank Panel. When you use only one side of a 1700F05 enclosure, insert  
a 1700F06 Blank Panel in the unused side to improve appearance and air flow.  
1700F07 Utility Drawer. When you use only one side of a 1700F05, install the  
1700F07 utility drawer in the unused side to provide storage and improve  
appearance and air flow. The drawer opens and closes freely, unless latched for  
transport.  
1–4  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
This section provides instructions for installing the waveform monitor into a  
standard rack or one of the optional cases. At installation time, save the shipping  
carton and packing materials (including the anti-static bag) in case you need to  
ship the instrument.  
Included Accessories  
Hardware Installation  
The waveform monitor is shipped with several accessory items which may be  
required for normal use. For more information on accessories, refer to page 1–2.  
Because operating environments vary, the waveform monitor is not shipped with  
a cabinet unless you have ordered one. All qualification testing for the waveform  
monitor was performed in a 1700F00 cabinet. To guarantee compliance with  
specifications, you should operate the waveform monitor in one of the cabinets  
described here.  
Cabinets  
The cabinets offered for the waveform monitor provide EMI shielding, protect  
against electrical shock, and protect against the accumulation of dust. Figure 1–1  
shows the plain cabinet, option 1700F00. A rear panel fan supplies filtered,  
cooling air which exits through the cabinet vent holes. Restricting the air flow  
through the vents or the rear fan can lead to an excessive internal temperature.  
NOTE. To meet EMI emission specifications, the waveform monitor must be  
installed in a Tektronix 1700F00, 1700F02, or 1700F05 enclosure. The enclosure  
front edges must securely contact the conductive front bezel on all four sides.  
1–5  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
21 cm  
(8.25 in)  
42.7 cm  
(16.2 in)  
13 cm  
(5.1 in)  
Figure 1–1: Dimensions of the 1700F00 plain cabinet  
The optional 1700F00 cabinet is the basic element for all of the cabinets. The  
1700F02 Portable carrying case is an enhanced version of the 1700F00 cabinet,  
as is the 1700F05 side-by-side rack mount assembly. All cabinets are available  
from your Tektronix representative.  
1–6  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
The portable cabinet, 1700F02, is shown in Figure 1–2. The 1700F02 has a  
handle, four feet, and a flip-up stand. The mounting hole sizes and spacing are  
different from those of the 1700F00.  
21 cm  
(8.25 in)  
42.7 cm  
(16.2 in)  
13 cm  
(5.1 in)  
Figure 1–2: 1700F02 portable cabinet  
1–7  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
Installing the Waveform  
Monitor in a Cabinet  
Secure the waveform monitor in a cabinet using two 6-32 Pozidriver screws.  
Figure 1–3 shows the location of these screws on the rear panel.  
CAUTION. Do not carry a waveform monitor in a cabinet without installing the  
rear panel mounting screws. Without the mounting screws, there is nothing to  
keep the waveform monitor in its cabinet.  
Cabinet securing  
screws  
Figure 1–3: Rear view of the waveform monitor in a 1700F02 cabinet  
1–8  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
Rack Adapter  
The optional 1700F05 side-by-side rack adapter, shown in Figure 1–4, consists of  
two attached cabinets. Use it to mount the waveform monitor and another  
half-rack width instrument, such as an analog component monitor, in a standard  
19-inch rack.  
You can adjust the rack adapter so that the waveform monitor is aligned with  
other equipment in the rack. See Figure 1–4.  
48.2 cm  
(19 in)  
13.2 cm  
(5.3 in)  
Mounting  
holes  
43.9 cm  
(17.3 in)  
Mounting  
holes  
Front panel  
alignment holes  
Figure 1–4: The 1700F05 rack cabinet holds two instruments  
1–9  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
If you are using only one side of the rack adapter, insert a blank panel (1700F06)  
or an accessory drawer (1700F07) in the unused section to improve airflow and  
appearance. Figure 1–5 shows the blank panel and drawer.  
1700F05  
1700F07  
1700F06  
Figure 1–5: 1700F05 cabinet showing utility drawer and blank panel  
Repackaging for  
Shipment  
To ship the waveform monitor to a Tektronix Service Center for service, follow  
these instructions:  
1. Attach a tag to the waveform monitor showing the name of the owner, the  
complete address, the phone number, the instrument serial number and a  
description of the required service.  
2. Repackage the instrument in the original packaging materials. If the original  
packaging materials are not available, follow these instructions:  
a. Obtain a carton of corrugated cardboard having inside dimensions at  
least six inches greater than the dimensions of the instrument. Use a  
shipping carton that has a test strength of at least 275 pounds.  
b. Surround the instrument with a protective bag (anti-static preferred). For  
instruments that are not in a cabinet, wrap a cardboard piece around the  
bagged instrument to protect internal components.  
1–10  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
c. Pack dunnage or urethane foam between the instrument and the carton. If  
using Styrofoam kernels, overfill the box and compress when closing the  
lid. You need three inches of cushioning on all sides of the instrument.  
3. Seal the carton with shipping tape or industrial staples.  
Connecting Power  
The waveform monitor operates from a single-phase power source with the  
neutral conductor at or near earth ground. The line conductor is fused for  
over-current protection. A protective ground connection through the grounding  
conductor in the power cord is essential for safe operation.  
WARNING. When power is supplied, line voltage will be present in the waveform  
monitor, even if the POWER switch is set to STANDBY.  
AC Power Requirements  
The waveform monitor operates from an AC line frequency of 50 or 60 Hz, over  
the range of 90–250 Volts, without the need for configuration, except the power  
cord. Refer to page 1–2 for the power cord options. The typical power draw is  
75 W. Refer to Appendix A: Specifications for additional information on power  
and environmental requirements.  
1–11  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
Installing the Waveform Monitor in a Serial Video System  
The serial digital monitor can operate almost anywhere in the distribution system  
due to its high impedance, bridging, loop-through inputs. This section describes  
two types of connections and presents useful information on line termination.  
Most serial equipment employs a receiver that regenerates an output signal, such  
as the receiver shown in Figure 1–6. Routing the incoming serial signal through  
one of the waveform monitor loop-though inputs and connecting the output of  
the serial receiver to the other loop-through input allows you to compare the  
incoming signal and the regenerated output signal.  
Serial source  
Regenerated  
serial output  
Waveform Monitor  
(rear panel)  
Serial receiver  
Output  
SER A  
Loop-through input  
Input  
Serial video  
output signal  
SER B  
Loop-through input  
Figure 1–6: Monitoring the video bit stream of a serial receiver  
1–12  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
You can use the waveform monitor to check serial digital signals around a  
routing switcher. It is possible to look at all the inputs to the switcher with the use  
of a patch panel and the serial monitor as shown in Figure 1–7.  
Waveform Monitor  
(rear panel)  
Serial video output signal  
Patch panel  
Serial router  
SER A  
Loop-through input  
SER B  
Loop-through input  
Serial  
sources  
Output  
Figure 1–7: Monitoring serial digital signals around a routing switcher  
Line Termination  
The waveform monitor uses passive loop-through serial inputs, similar in concept  
to those used in baseband video equipment. Accordingly, the loop-through must  
be terminated externally. It is important that this external termination meet  
accuracy and return loss requirements.  
If the waveform monitor is installed to monitor an operating link, the destination  
receiver and the connecting cable serve as the termination. This monitoring  
connection is best because it checks the performance of the entire serial path. The  
return loss of the waveform monitor is sufficiently high that, in most cases, the  
destination receiver sets the system return loss.  
In cases where the waveform monitor is placed at the end of a link, a BNC  
termination must be installed on one side of the loop-through connector. The  
termination must be 75 W and DC coupled (good return loss extends to DC).  
Return loss should exceed 25 dB from 10 kHz to 270 MHz. The supplied 75 W  
terminators meet these requirements.  
A terminator can be inspected for return loss problems using the WFM 601M or  
WFM 601E waveform monitor and a serial source with low aberrations, such as  
the Tektronix TG 2000 mainframe with a DVG1 Generator module. Connect the  
generator serial output to one side of the waveform monitor loop-through  
connector and install the terminator on the other side. Select the EYE mode and  
observe the Eye Pattern, paying particular attention to leading edge aberrations.  
1–13  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
Figure 1–8 shows the Eye Pattern with a good return loss terminator. Figure 1–9  
shows the distorted Eye Pattern of a terminator having only 13 dB return loss  
(capacitive) at 100 MHz. Terminations with aberrations under 10% are accept-  
able.  
Figure 1–8: Eye Pattern display of a termination with good return loss  
Figure 1–9: Eye Pattern display of a termination with poor return loss  
Compatibility of BNC Center Pins. Most video equipment BNC connectors,  
whether 50 or 75 W, use a 50 W standard center pin. Some laboratory 75 W BNC  
connectors use a smaller diameter center pin. The BNC connectors on the  
WFM 601M are designed to work with the 50 W standard (large diameter) center  
pins.  
Do not use connectors or terminators with the smaller center pins. They could  
cause intermittent connections.  
1–14  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functional Check  
The following procedure provides a basic operational check of the waveform  
monitor. Only instrument functions, not measurement quantities or specifications,  
are checked in this procedure. Therefore, a minimum amount of test equipment is  
required.  
WARNING. To avoid personal injury, be sure that a cabinet is installed on the  
instrument.  
All checks are made with the cabinet installed. The cabinet, an optional  
accessory, must be installed on the instrument to avoid personal injury, maintain  
proper environment for the instrument, keep dust out, and provide proper EMI  
shielding.  
If the Functional Check reveals improper operation or an instrument malfunction,  
check the connections to and the operation of the test equipment. If it is operating  
normally and the failure is repeatable, send the waveform monitor to qualified  
service personnel for repair or adjustment.  
For a complete check of the instrument performance, refer qualified service  
personnel to the Performance Verification Procedure in the Service manual.  
Required Equipment  
The following equipment is required to perform this procedure:  
H
Digital Component Television Signal Generator (1)  
Provides 100% Color Bar signal.  
For example: The Tektronix TG 2000 Signal Generation Platform with a  
DVG1 module.  
H
H
H
Function generator (1) (for WFM 601A only)  
For example: Tegam FG 503  
Coaxial Cable (1)  
42-inch, 75 W, RG6 cable (Tektronix Part No. 012-0159-00) or equivalent  
75 W Terminator (1)  
End-line (Tektronix Part No. 011-0163-00)  
1–15  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functional Check  
Initial Equipment Connections  
Figure 1–10 shows how to configure a signal generator and the waveform  
monitor to preform the Functional Check procedure.  
Waveform Monitor  
(rear panel)  
Signal  
generator  
75 W terminator  
SER A  
Output  
Loop-through input  
Figure 1–10: Initial equipment connections  
Follow these steps to configure the test equipment.  
1. Ensure the waveform monitor is enclosed in a cabinet before connecting AC  
power.  
2. Connect the waveform monitor to an appropriate AC power source.  
3. Connect the component serial digital output of the signal generator to one  
side of the SER A input.  
4. Terminate the other side of the loop-through the SER A input with the 75 W  
terminator.  
5. For the WFM 601A only, connect one of the Function Generator audio  
outputs to pins 8 and 9 of the REMOTE 25-pin connector; connect the other  
output to pins 10 and 11. See Appendix B: Remote Operation for more  
information on configuring the waveform monitor’s remote connector for  
audio input. Ensure that the generator amplitude is a nominal 5 V, but not  
greater than 8 Vpeak.  
This procedure does not check the monitor outputs (MON OUT). To check these  
outputs, connect a GBR or YPbPr analog component monitor and check for the  
Color bar pattern during the procedure.  
1–16  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functional Check  
Functional Check Procedure  
Perform the following steps to check the basic functions.  
WARNING. A shock hazard exists in the waveform monitor when it has no cabinet  
and it is connected to AC power. Always install the waveform monitor in a  
cabinet before use.  
1. Perform steps listed under Initial Equipment Connections.  
2. Set the video generator to produce a 100% Color Bar signal and to enable its  
output.  
3. Press the front-panel power switch on the waveform monitor. Check that the  
indicator beside the switch lights up indicating ON.  
4. Check that the CRT and graticule light up. When you apply power, the  
waveform monitor restores its last settings.  
5. Initialize the waveform monitor settings. The waveform monitor contains a  
factory Preset that restores the instrument to factory settings.  
a. Press the PRESET MENU button.  
b. Select the FACTORY setting by turning the bezel knob under the list of  
presets to highlight FACTORY  
c. Press the bezel button adjacent to RECALL to load the factory preset.  
d. Check for the Waveform display mode with one channel of the Color Bar  
signal displayed. Your display should look similar to Figure 1–11.  
1–17  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functional Check  
@ 525/2:1  
10mS/DIV  
Figure 1–11: Initial display in the Waveform display mode  
1–18  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functional Check  
6. Check the display brightness controls.  
a. Press the CRT MENU button. The display controls should appear as  
shown in Figure 1–12.  
b. Check that you can position the waveform by adjusting the VERT and  
HORIZ POS bezel knobs. Leave the signal horizontally centered and  
with the waveform bottom on the 0 V line.  
@ 525/2:1  
10mS/DIV  
DISPLAY  
READOUT  
TRACE  
RD TEST  
ON OFF  
FOCUS  
SCALE  
INTENSITY  
Figure 1–12: Channel 1 of a color bar signal with CRT adjustments visible  
c. Use the bezel knobs under the CRT to adjust the focus, brightness of the  
graticule scale, and intensity of the trace. Adjust the display controls to  
the desired viewing levels.  
d. Press the top bezel button to select READOUT. Adjust the readout  
intensity to the desired level.  
e. Exit the CRT menu by pressing the CRT button. The changes made while  
the menu was displayed remain in effect.  
1–19  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functional Check  
7. Check the Eye Display mode. (WFM 601E and WFM 601M only)  
a. Press the EYE/JITTER button to select the Eye display mode. The  
indicator next to EYE should light.  
b. Check that the waveform is triggered to produce an Eye display like that  
in Figure 1–13. The degree of noise on the Eye waveform is determined  
by the video generator and connecting cables.  
c. Press the lower bezel button to change from FLAT mode to EYE EQ  
mode. You should hear the click of a relay and the display will change  
slightly as the equalization circuit modifies the waveform.  
d. Press the bezel button again to return to the FLAT mode.  
100mV/DIV  
OVERLAY  
1nS/DIV  
EYE  
EQ EYE  
Figure 1–13: Eye Pattern display mode  
8. Check the Jitter display mode. (WFM 601M only)  
a. Press the EYE/JITTER button to select the Jitter display mode. The  
indicator next to JITTER should light.  
b. The Jitter display should resemble that shown in Figure 1–14. Your jitter  
readout values may differ from those in Figure 1–14. Jitter values are  
affected by the quality of the signal source and connecting cables.  
1–20  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functional Check  
1 UI/DIV  
10mS/DIV  
10HZ  
JITTER (P-P)  
TIMING  
0.10UI  
10HZ HPF  
0.10UI  
Figure 1–14: Jitter display mode  
9. Check the Vector display modes.  
a. Press the VECTOR/GAMUT button to select the Vector mode. The  
indicator next to VECTOR should light.  
b. Check that the display looks like the Vector display pictured in Fig-  
ure 1–15.  
c. If the display does not appear as illustrated, ensure that the generator is  
set to output a 100% Color Bar signal.  
d. Press the bezel button labeled VECTOR/LIGHTNING to select the  
Lightning display.  
e. Check that the display looks like the Lightning display pictured in  
Figure 1–16.  
1–21  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functional Check  
@ 525/2:1  
10mS/DIV  
R
M
G
100% BARS  
I
Y
L
B
G
C
Y
Figure 1–15: Vector display for a 100% Color Bar signal  
@ 525/2:1  
Y
L
C
G
M
R
B
B
R
M
G
C
VECTOR  
LIGHTNING  
Y
L
Figure 1–16: Lightning display for a 100% Color Bar signal  
1–22  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functional Check  
10. Check the Gamut display modes.  
a. Press the VECTOR/GAMUT button to select the GAMUT display mode.  
The indicator next to GAMUT should light up.  
b. If the bezel button labeled DIAMOND/ARROWHEAD does not have  
Arrowhead selected, press that bezel button to select ARROWHEAD.  
c. Check that the display looks like the Arrowhead gamut display in  
Figure 1–17.  
@ 525/2:1  
Y
ARROWHEAD  
DIAMOND  
| C |  
Figure 1–17: Arrowhead gamut display  
1–23  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functional Check  
d. Press the bezel button again to select the Diamond display mode.  
e. Check that the display looks like the Diamond gamut display in  
Figure 1–18.  
@ 525/2:1  
G
B
G
R
ARROWHEAD  
DIAMOND  
Figure 1–18: Diamond gamut display  
11. Check the Digital Waveform display modes. (WFM 601M only)  
a. Press the DGTL WFM/DGTL LIST button to select the Digital  
Waveform display mode. The indicator next to DGTL WFM should light  
up.  
b. If the bezel button labeled VIDEO/DATA does not have VIDEO  
selected, press that bezel button to select VIDEO.  
c. Check that the display looks like the Video digital waveform display in  
Figure 1–19.  
1–24  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functional Check  
@ 525/2:1  
F1: 50  
10mS/DIV  
VIDEO  
Y’ 840 d  
DATA  
SMP 271  
ACTIVE  
UPDATE  
FREEZE  
NEXT FIELD  
HEX  
DECIMAL  
BINARY  
LINE SEL  
SAMPLE  
Figure 1–19: Video digital waveform  
d. Press the bezel button again to select the DATA display mode.  
e. Check that the display looks like the Data digital waveform display in  
Figure 1–20.  
1–25  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functional Check  
@ 525/2:1  
F1: 50  
10mS/DIV  
VIDEO  
DATA 840 d  
DATA  
SMP 271  
ACTIVE  
UPDATE  
FREEZE  
NEXT FIELD  
HEX  
DECIMAL  
BINARY  
LINE SEL  
SAMPLE  
Figure 1–20: Data digital waveform  
12. Check the Audio display mode. (WFM 601A only)  
a. Set the function generator for a sine wave at 1 kHz and 10 Vpk-pk or less  
amplitude.  
b. Press the ANALOG AUDIO button. The AUDIO button indicator should  
light.  
c. Check that the display looks like the Audio display in Figure 1–21.  
1/2  
1dB  
40°  
20°  
Figure 1–21: Typical Audio display with small phase error  
1–26  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functional Overview  
This section provides an overview of the front-panel features and rear-panel  
connectors for the waveform monitor  
Front Panel Overview  
Figures 2–1 and 2–2 show the front panels of the three waveform monitors. A  
brief discussion of each feature follows the illustrations. For detailed informa-  
tion, refer to section 3, Reference.  
Figure 2–1: WFM 601M front panel  
2–1  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functional Overview  
WFM 601A front panel  
WFM 601E front panel  
Figure 2–2: WFM 601A and WFM 601E front panels  
DISPLAY and VIDEO  
DISPLAY Buttons  
Six buttons in the DISPLAY or VIDEO DISPLAY area control the type of  
display. Most buttons represent two related types of displays. Press a button to  
select one of its two displays. Press the button again to select the other. When  
you select a display type, the indicator beside it lights up.  
EYE. Displays the serial input signal as an Eye pattern display. For the  
WFM 601M, you can choose standard or equalized Eye displays with a bezel  
button.  
EQ EYE . (WFM 601E only) Displays the input signal as an equalized Eye pattern  
display, which is useful when the signal has been degraded by long transmission  
lines.  
JITTER. (WFM 601M only) Displays the peak-to-peak jitter measurement over a  
specified bandwidth. The display includes the demodulated jitter waveform for  
measurement.  
VECTOR. Displays the component signals as either conventional Vector or  
Lightning mode. Vector mode plots the chrominance signals, Pb and Pr, against  
each other to show their phase and amplitude relationships. The Lightning mode  
shows amplitude and timing relationships between the luminance and chromi-  
2–2  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functional Overview  
nance signals. The top of the display plots Y against Pb while the bottom plots Y  
against Pr.  
GAMUT. Displays the video signal in Diamond or Arrowhead gamut displays.  
Diamond mode evaluates RGB signals for gamut limit violations. Arrowhead  
display plots Y versus chrominance magnitude to show adherence to composite  
gamut limits. A gamut error message appears at the lower-left when an RGB or  
Composite gamut error is detected. Turn this alarm on or off in the CONFIG  
menu.  
WAVEFORM. Displays the video signal as voltage versus time. Any or all of the  
three channels can be displayed from a single video line.  
PARADE. Displays up to three channels of the serial video signal in succession.  
MULTIPLE. Allows two display modes to be active at the same time. The  
Waveform or Parade can be displayed with either Vector, Lightning, or Diamond.  
PICTURE. Displays the video signal source. When Line Select is on, the selected  
line is highlighted to identify where it is in the video picture.  
BOWTIE. Displays a bowtie test signal to determine timing differences between  
the three component signals, Y, Pb, and Pr. The external video source must  
generate a Bowtie test signal.  
DGTL WFM. (WFM 601M only) Displays the displays digital word values as a  
waveform. The data values are not interpolated to generate the waveform.  
DGTL LIST. (WFM 601M only) Displays the sequential data values in a list. Data  
may be in linear data sequence or as groups of four values as they appear in the  
multiplexed data stream: CB, Y, CR, Y’.  
AUDIO ANALOG  
(WFM 601A Only)  
Displays the stereo analog audio input as a Lissajous pattern. The size of the  
opening in the pattern is relative to the phase error between the X and Y audio  
channels. The Lissajous pattern will take one of three general forms: a line, an  
ellipse, or a circle.  
2–3  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functional Overview  
Bezel Knobs  
The center three knobs located below the CRT have multiple functions. Your  
selection of DISPLAY or MENU functions or items from on-screen menus  
determine the current function of each knob. A label adjacent to the knob  
indicates its current function. The outside knobs are permanently assigned to  
control vertical and horizontal trace position.  
Bezel Buttons  
The five bezel buttons along the right side of the CRT have multiple functions.  
Your selection of DISPLAY modes, MENU functions, or on-screen items from  
the displayed menus determine the current function of each button. A label  
adjacent to each button indicates its current selection. The buttons either step  
through a list of two or more items or turn a function on or off.  
VIDEO IN  
SWEEP  
Allows you to turn on or off CH 1 (Y/R), CH 2 (PB/G), and CH 3 (PR/B) and to  
select the serial digital signal from input SERIAL A or B. At least one input and  
one channel are always on.  
The two Sweep buttons select the waveform monitor sweep rate and horizontal  
magnification.  
LINE / FIELD. Toggles through four sweep rates: 1-Line (5 ms/div), 2-Line  
(10 ms/division), 1-Field, and 2-Field. Selections are limited in some display  
modes.  
MAG. Provides horizontal magnification of waveform signals. Use the Horizontal  
Position bezel knob to move left or right on through the waveform.  
SERIAL  
Displays a status screen providing EDH error statistics and format error  
reporting, including ANC data errors and line/field length errors. This area  
includes two indicators.  
EDH DET. Lights up when the incoming serial digital signal has the SMPTE  
RP165 specified Error Detection and Handling (EDH) signal.  
ALARM. Lights up when a serial video data or format error occurs or when a  
serial signal is not detected.  
REF (Reference)  
MENU  
Selects either internal serial digital or external composite video input for the  
instrument synchronization reference.  
Provides access to configuration and measurement functions that affect the  
DISPLAY mode. Press a MENU button to display that menu and enable the  
2–4  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functional Overview  
associated functions. Press the button again to exit the menu and disable the  
function.  
POWER  
Puts the waveform monitor into the standby or operational state.  
CLEAR MENU  
Turns off the MENU function readouts without affecting the menu settings. Also,  
provides access to alternative displays in some display modes.  
Using the Menus  
The instrument has a set of front-panel selectable MENU buttons that call up  
CRT readout menus. These menus operate in conjunction with the five bezel  
buttons along the side of the CRT and the three knobs directly beneath it. See  
Figure 2–3.  
Enabled menu selections are surrounded by a rectangle to indicate that they are  
active.  
Pressing the CLEAR MENU button turns off the menu readout while leaving the  
functions associated with the current Display mode.  
Pressing a MENU button when its menu is displayed turns off both the menu  
readout and, in most cases, disables the function. By selecting Line Select,  
Cursor, Filter, or Gain, the last settings are returned. For example, if X5 was  
active when you last used the Gain menu, returning to the Gain menu restores X5  
gain.  
Bezel buttons  
Display menus  
with their  
optional selections  
Menu selection buttons  
Menu clear  
Bezel knobs  
Figure 2–3: Elements of the waveform monitor menu controls  
2–5  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functional Overview  
Rear Panel Connectors  
Figure 2–4 shows the rear panel of the waveform monitor. A brief discussion of  
each connector follows the illustration.  
Power Connector  
The waveform monitor is designed to operate from a single-phase power source  
with the neutral conductor at or near earth ground. Only the line conductor is  
fused for over-current protection. A protective ground connection through the  
grounding conductor in the power cord is essential for safe operation.  
WARNING. Dangerous potentials are present on the Power circuit board. Do not  
connect power to the waveform monitor if it is not enclosed in a prescribed  
cabinet.  
The waveform monitor operates from an AC line frequency of 50 and 60 Hz,  
over the range of 90–250 VAC, without the need for configuration. Refer to  
Appendix A: Specifications for additional information on power and environmen-  
tal requirements.  
Power connector  
Figure 2–4: Rear panel of the waveform monitor  
2–6  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functional Overview  
Loop-Through Inputs  
There are three passive loop-through inputs located on the rear panel. All are  
compensated for 75 W impedance and require proper termination at one end of  
the loop-through connector or at the receiver in a monitored system.  
SER A and SER B. Provides for connection of two 270 Mb serial component data  
signals. These inputs have minimal impact on the monitored serial data path.  
EXT REF. Provides for connection of an external synchronization signal such as  
black burst or composite video.  
Coaxial Outputs  
Five rear panel connections drive signals into a 75 W environment.  
MON OUT (Y/G, PB/B, PR/R). Provides three 75 W component signal outputs to  
drive a component picture monitor. You can set the output format to YPBPR or  
GBR. Invalid input signals cause a blinking highlight of the monitor display at  
the line where the error occurs. This gamut error highlight or “bright-up” signal  
is present on the Y (or G) output and is controlled in the CONFIG menu.  
SERIAL OUT. Provides a reclocked version of the selected signal input (SER A or  
SER B).  
JITTER OUT. (WFM 601M only) Provides a 75 W output signal from the jitter  
demodulator. The Jitter high-pass filter (JITTER HPF) selection does not affect  
this signal. You can view the jitter waveform on the waveform monitor using the  
JITTER display mode.  
Multi-Pin Connectors  
Two multi-pin connectors provide control using a PC or other controller. Refer to  
Appendix B for pin assignment information for these connectors.  
RS-232. This 9-pin subminiature D-type connector provides a serial interface for  
remote control and calibration.  
REMOTE. This 25-pin subminiature D-type connector provides limited remote  
control functions.  
2–7  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functional Overview  
2–8  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
This section provides detailed information on the waveform monitor functions.  
The topics are organized alphabetically. Most topics are named after the front  
panel labels and button names.  
Audio Display (WFM 601A Only)  
The Audio display allows you to measure stereo audio phase errors of 20 kHz  
analog stereo audio signals. Connect the audio signals to the Remote Connector  
described in Appendix B on page B–2.  
Correct phasing between two audio channels is quickly verified by the degree of  
separation in the pattern shown on the display. Amplitudes are verified by the  
direction of the pattern’s axis.  
Audio amplitude and phase is monitored using a calibrated X/Y Lissajous  
display. Using this display you can verify that the program audio will be properly  
reproduced on both monaural and stereo receivers.  
Lissajous Patterns  
Any oscilloscope, including a vectorscope, that has identical X and Y amplifiers  
can make accurate stereo audio phase measurements. When identical signals of  
equal amplitude are input, the display pattern produced will be a Lissajous  
pattern. The opening of the Lissajous pattern is relative to the phase error  
between the signals. The remainder of this section discusses some of the  
Lissajous patterns generated by the waveform monitor.  
Figure 3–1 depicts an input audio signal from one channel. The figure on the left  
depicts input from the X channel only, which produces a line pattern along the X  
axis of an XY plot. Similarly, a line pattern along the Y axis of an XY plot  
indicates an input audio signal from the Y channel only, as shown in the figure  
on the right.  
X
Y
X
Y
=
=
Figure 3–1: A signal from one channel only  
3–1  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Figure 3–2 depicts an input audio signal in which the X and Y channels are in  
perfect phase and have equal amplitudes.  
X
=
Y
Figure 3–2: X and Y signal in phase with equal amplitudes  
Figure 3–3 depicts an input audio signal in which the X and Y channels are out  
of phase by some amount but have equal amplitudes. The pattern is an ellipse  
rather than an line, which indicates the signals are out of phase. The axis of the  
ellipse lies terminates in the target boxes, which indicates that the amplitudes are  
equal.  
X
=
Y
Figure 3–3: Signals out of phase with equal amplitudes  
3–2  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Figure 3–4 depicts signals out of phase with unequal amplitudes. The figure on  
the left shows a signal in which the X channel amplitude is greater than the Y  
channel. The figure on the right depicts a signal with a larger Y channel  
amplitude.  
X
Y
X
Y
=
=
Figure 3–4: Signals out of phase with unequal amplitudes  
Figure 3–5 depicts an input audio signal in which the X and Y channels are  
reversed (reversed polarity) with equal amplitudes.  
X
=
Y
Figure 3–5: Signals with reverse polarity and equal amplitudes  
If the phase error between the X and Y channels is exactly 90 degrees and the  
amplitudes are equal, the pattern of the audio signal input is a circle. See  
Figure 3–6.  
X
=
Y
Figure 3–6: Signals with a phase error of 90 degrees and equal amplitudes  
3–3  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Measuring Phase Error  
The electronic graticule of the Analog Audio Display has scales for measuring  
stereo audio phase and amplitude errors. The dashed diagonal line is the  
measurement axis for errors less than 90 degrees and is terminated in amplitude  
targets that correspond to the length of the X and Y axes. The boxes surrounding  
the crosshairs are equal to amplitude errors of 1/2 and 1 dB, respectively.  
Phase error is measured as degrees of phase shift and is relative to the minor axis  
of the ellipse pattern displayed on the CRT. To determine the phase error, read the  
value of the electronic graticule where the ellipse is tangent to the scale of the  
electronic graticule.  
1/2  
1dB  
40°  
20°  
Figure 3–7: Typical Audio display pattern with small phase error  
Adjusting the Audio Gain  
The waveform monitor has four graticule calibrations available: 0, +4, +8, and  
+12 dBu. To adjust these levels use the following procedure.  
1. While in the Audio display mode, press the GAIN menu button.  
2. Press one of the bezel buttons to select the appropriate calibration level.  
3–4  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Bowtie Display  
The Bowtie display evaluates the relative amplitude and timing between the three  
video channels. This display requires a special test signal from the monitored  
source. See Figure 3–8. The Tektronix TG 2000 Waveform Generator can  
produce a bowtie signal with 20 ns time marks, which aid in signal evaluation.  
The signal is a 500 kHz sinewave on CH 1 (luminance) and 502 kHz sine waves  
on CH 2 (Pb) and CH 3 (Pr).  
The display is made up of two separate waveforms as shown in Figure 3–8. The  
left waveform always compares CH 1 to CH 2. The right waveform always  
compares CH 1 to CH 3.  
Figure 3–8: Typical Bowtie display on the waveform monitor  
3–5  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Timing Measurement  
The timing measurement is based on alignment of the center marker and the null  
point at the center of the waveform. The generator provides a center marker,  
which is centered on the null point when interchannel timing is correct. A shift of  
the null to the left or right indicates a difference in the relative timing. If the null  
shifts two full time markers, the relative timing error between channels would be  
40 ns. If the null is to the left of the center marker, the color difference channel is  
advanced relative to the luminance channel. When either of the nulls is shifted to  
the right, that color difference signal is delayed relative to the luminance channel.  
In Figure 3–9, the chrominance channel—CH 3 (Pr)—is advanced relative to the  
luminance channel by 20 ns.  
Shifted null point  
Figure 3–9: Bowtie waveform showing a timing error in CH 3  
Although you can use Waveform or Lightning displays to determine channel  
timing, the Bowtie method provides better resolution of channel timing and is the  
easiest to use.  
Relative Gain Check  
The bowtie measurement provides a method to determine whether the relative  
channel gain is correct. If the gains are not equal, the center null point will not be  
a complete null. Figure 3–10 shows a Bowtie display with an incomplete null in  
the right waveform. If the gain error is in CH 1, neither waveform has a complete  
null. If CH 2 gain is off, the left waveform will not null completely, but the right  
one will. If the gain is off for CH 3, as in Figure 3–10, the left waveform will be  
normal and the right one will not reach a complete null.  
Incomplete null  
Figure 3–10: Bowtie waveform showing gain error in CH 3  
3–6  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Calibration  
Instrument gain may require adjustment for special monitoring applications or to  
ensure the best precision for cursor or graticule signal measurements. Follow  
these procedures to set the vertical and horizontal gain.  
Setting Vertical Gain  
1. Press the WAVEFORM/PARADE button to select the Waveform display.  
2. Press the CONFIG menu button and use the bezel knob to select the  
CALIBRATE submenu. Press the bezel buttons to set CAL SIG on and  
GAIN CAL on.  
3. Use the VERT POS control to place the calibrator signal between the 0 V  
reference and 0.7 graticule lines. The amplitude of the calibration signal is  
exactly 700 mV.  
4. If the RESET V CAL readout is on, press the adjacent bezel button to turn it  
off. Pressing the RESET V CAL bezel button reinstates the gain setting  
established at the last calibration.  
5. Check to see that the calibrator signal is now displayed at exactly 700 mV. If  
the gain is off, adjust the gain for exactly 700 mV with the V CAL bezel  
knob. Press the GAIN CAL button if the V CAL knob is not available.  
Setting Horizontal Gain  
1. Press the Waveform/PARADE button to select the Waveform display.  
2. Press the CONFIG menu button and use the bezel knob to select the  
CALIBRATE submenu. Press the bezel buttons to set CAL SIG on and  
GAIN CAL on.  
3. If the RESET H CAL readout is on, press the adjacent bezel button to turn it  
off. Pressing the RESET H CAL bezel button reinstates the gain setting  
established at the last calibration.  
4. Press the SWEEP LINE/FIELD button to select the 2 Line sweep mode  
(10 ms/div) and check for one full cycle per major division.  
5. If the gain is off slightly, adjust the horizontal gain with the H CAL bezel  
knob. If the H CAL knob is not available, press the GAIN CAL button.  
3–7  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Configure Menus  
The Configure menu provides configuration selections for all display modes and  
some external signals. Press the CONFIG MENU button at any time to enter the  
Configure menu. Figure 3–11 shows a sample Configure menu and the bezel  
knob used to select from the list of Configure menus. Figure 3–12 provides a  
map of all Configure menu functions.  
COLOR BARS  
75% 100%  
WFM/VEC  
GAMUT  
WFM AS  
RGB YPBPR  
EYE PATTERN  
JITTER  
PBPR OFFSET  
0 mV  
350 mV  
SER ALARM  
FORMAT  
EAV-SAV  
PASS STRIP  
CALIBRATE  
Figure 3–11: Configure menu for WFM/VEC showing the selection knob  
Turning the knob causes a selection box to scroll through the menu list. The  
selections assigned to the bezel buttons change as you scroll through the list of  
Configure menus. Press the CONFIG button again to remove the Configure  
menu.  
3–8  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
WFM/VEC  
GAMUT  
COLOR BARS  
GAMUT CHECK  
75%  
100%  
OFF  
RGB  
CMPST  
BOTH  
EYE PATTERN (WFM 601E and WFM 601M only)  
JITTER (WFM 601M only)  
MODE  
OVERLAY  
10 EYE  
WFM AS  
JITTER HPF  
10 Hz  
1kHz  
10kHz  
RGB  
YPBPR  
SER ALARM  
FORMAT  
CALIBRATE  
MISSING VID  
ALARM DISP  
OFF  
ALARM  
PBPR OFFSET  
0 mV  
SCREEN  
PIX MON  
BOTH  
CLOCK BW  
10 Hz  
100 Hz  
FULL FIELD  
100kHz  
350 mV  
CRC ERROR  
OFF ALARM  
READOUT  
UI  
SEC  
1 kHz  
EAV-SAV  
GAMUT (IRE)  
100  
120  
PASS  
STRIP  
110  
131  
ACTIVE PIC  
CRC ERROR  
OFF  
OFF  
ALARM  
LIMIT  
FORMAT  
NTSC  
PAL  
FMT ERROR  
OFF ALARM  
AUTO  
MON OUT AS  
CAL SIG  
ON OFF  
GBR  
YPBPR  
STANDARD  
GAIN CAL  
ON OFF  
525/2:1  
625/2:1  
AUTO  
SYNC  
DIRECT  
AFC  
Figure 3–12: Map of functions available in the Configure menu  
Configure Menu  
Description  
The following list describes the items in each Configure menu.  
WFM/VEC. Contains choices for the Waveform, Parade, Vector, and Lightning  
video displays.  
H
H
COLOR BARS. Selects either 75% or 100% graticules for the Lightning and  
Vector modes.  
WFM AS. In Waveform or Parade modes, determines if channels 1, 2, and 3  
are displayed in their native Y, Pb, Pr format (YPbPr) or transcoded to R, G,  
B (RGB). WFM AS does not affect the picture monitor output signal (MON  
OUT).  
H
H
PBPR OFFSET. Allows adding a 350 mV positive offset to the Pb and Pr  
channels to facilitate comparison with the Y channel. Does not affect the  
transcoded RGB display or the picture monitor out signal.  
EAV-SAV. Determines what data is passed to the D/A converters. In Strip  
mode, only digital signals between the SAV and EAV (start and end of active  
region) sync words are passed to the D/A converters and subsequently to the  
display and the picture monitor output. In Pass mode all digital data is sent to  
the converters.  
3–9  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
GAMUT. Configures conditions and error indicators for the gamut error alarm.  
H
GAMUT CHECK. Determines whether RGB, Composite (CMPST), or both  
types of gamut errors trigger the gamut alarm. RGB indicates when the R, G,  
or B signals are less than 0 mV or greater than 700 mV. CMPST indicates  
when the sum of luminance and peak chrominance exceed the level selected  
with GAMUT (IRE). Use ALARM DISP to determine the indicator of the  
gamut alarm.  
H
ALARM DISP. Determines how the gamut alarm is indicated. In SCREEN  
mode, a gamut error message appears in the lower left of the CRT. In PIX  
MON mode, the portion of the video picture that exceeds gamut, blinks in a  
highlighted or bright-up mode on the picture monitor output.  
H
H
GAMUT. Sets the level used for the CMPST gamut alarm. For NTSC, the  
levels are 100, 110, 120 and 131 IRE. For PAL, the levels are 700 mV and  
950 mV. Use GAMUT CHECK to pick the CMPST alarm.  
LIMIT FORMAT. Determines if the gamut limit check is for PAL or NTSC  
format signals. AUTO mode automatically determines the input format.  
EYE PATTERN. Selects the display mode and attenuation of low-frequency jitter  
for the EYE and EQ EYE display modes.  
H
H
MODE. Selects between OVERLAY and 10-EYE trigger modes. Overlay  
displays all bits of a serial word at each eye location. The 10-EYE mode  
displays all ten bits of the serial signal at ten fixed locations.  
CLOCK BW. Selects between 10 Hz, 100 Hz, and 1 kHz filters to suppress  
low-frequency jitter.  
JITTER. Configures the Jitter measurement with a high pass filter and the units of  
the readout.  
H
H
JITTER HPF. Selects from high pass filters 10 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz, and  
100 kHz. The selection appears in the jitter readout box and in the upper  
right corner of the CRT, just below the horizontal deflection factor.  
READOUT. Determines whether the jitter measurement is in the units UI  
(unit intervals) or seconds or if the readout is off.  
3–10  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
SER ALARM. Selects which events cause the Alarm indicator to light. The  
front-panel Alarm light can be activated by up to four different serial video  
conditions. Press the adjacent bezel buttons to turn these alarms on or off.  
When an alarm condition occurs, the Alarm light stays on for a minimum of one  
second. If selected alarm conditions occur at a frequency greater than once per  
second, the Alarm light stays on continuously.  
When any of the following conditions are enabled and a condition occurs, the  
alarm indicator turns on:  
H
H
H
H
MISSING VID. The input serial signal level drops below a preset threshold  
(determined by the serial receiver).  
FULL FIELD CRC ERROR. The transmitted cyclical redundancy checksum  
(CRC) does not match the actual CRC for the last video field.  
ACTIVE PIC CRC ERROR. The transmitted CRC does not match the actual  
CRC for the last active picture region.  
FMT ERROR. A serial format error occurs.  
FORMAT. Selects the format of the picture monitor out signal and the scanning  
standard expected by the waveform monitor.  
H
H
MON OUT AS. Configures the analog component picture monitor out signal  
as either Y, Pb, Pr, (YPbPr) or as GBR. Composite sync is added to the Y or  
G channel.  
STANDARD. Selects the scanning standard, from either 525/2:1 or 625/2:1,  
that the waveform monitor expects at the SER A and B inputs. This choice  
affects the monitor sweep rates and the line selector. In AUTO mode, the  
monitor selects either 525 or 625 line operation based on the detected field  
rate (60 Hz or 50 Hz).  
H
SYNC. Selects either Direct or AFC synchronization of the internal timing.  
The Direct mode uses the 27 MHz word clock as extracted from the serial  
digital signal. This mode passes any signal jitter on to other internal  
operations and to the MON OUT video signals. The AFC mode uses a  
phase-locked loop circuit to produce a stable clock. The phase-locked loop  
averages small-phase differences in the clock. The AFC mode is best in most  
situations. Use the Direct mode when large, low-frequency jitter is present in  
your system.  
3–11  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
CALIBRATE. Allows minor adjustment to the vertical and horizontal gain  
calibration prior to making amplitude measurements. To adjust gain, you need a  
700 mV, 100 kHz signal. Use a known external reference signal or the internal  
calibrator signal. Selections for the CALIBRATE menu are only present when in  
the Waveform or Parade display modes.  
H
CAL SIG. Turns on or off the internal 700 mV calibrator signal. The  
calibrator signal is synchronized in order to provide an accurate 100 kHz  
timing standard. If the calibrator signal varies significantly from 700 mV  
when RESET V CAL is not visible, then the waveform monitor may require  
calibration.  
H
GAIN CAL. Enables or disables the V CAL and H CAL controls. The  
V CAL knob adjusts vertical gain and the H CAL knob adjusts the horizontal  
gain. To return the gain to its original calibrated setting, press the RE-  
SET V CAL or H CAL bezel buttons.  
In addition, the following software version information appears:  
H
H
Software Version Number. The lower right corner of the CRT shows the  
version number for the instrument software preceded by a “V”.  
Coprocessor Code Version. The lower right corner of the CRT shows the  
version number of the serial coprocessor code preceded by a “C”.  
CRT Settings  
The CRT menu provides control of trace parameters and readout intensity. To  
access the CRT menu at any time, press the MENU CRT button. Press the top  
bezel button to access the Display, Readout and Trace controls. Use the assigned  
bezel knobs to adjust the display. You can control the following functions from  
the CRT menu:  
H
H
H
H
H
Focus. Sets the sharpness of the waveform trace.  
Scale. Sets the intensity of the side lights that illuminate the etched graticule.  
Intensity. Sets the trace intensity or brightness separately from the readout.  
Readout Intensity. Sets the readout intensity or brightness.  
Trace Rotation. Adjusts the rotation of the trace.  
How to Recover from  
Minimal Readout Intensity  
Readout intensity can be turned below the minimum viewing level, which makes  
all CRT menus disappear. If this happens, press the CRT menu button and note  
that the menu comes up at a reduced intensity. Pressing the top CRT bezel button  
once moves the cursor to READOUT and reduces the intensity again. At this  
3–12  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
point, turn the bezel knob next to the HORIZ POS knob clockwise to increase the  
readout intensity.  
Press the CRT button to exit the CRT menu.  
Cursors  
Cursors allow you to measure the amplitude or time difference between  
waveform features. Cursors usually provide better measurement resolution than  
is possible measuring against the etched graticule. Press the CURSOR MENU  
button to display the Cursor menu.  
Cursor Menu Features  
The Cursor menu allows you to choose Voltage Cursors, Time Cursors, Markers,  
or both Voltage and Time cursors. When Voltage and Time cursors are active, the  
three bezel knobs control cursor 1, cursor 2, and cursor tracking. The difference  
in the settings of cursor 1 and cursor 2, is reported with CRT readout as DV or  
DT. In the Both mode (V+T), use the CONTROL bezel button to alternate  
between voltage and time cursor control. Tracking locks the cursors at their  
current separation and lets you move them together.  
Markers provide adjustable screen reference points with no associated readout.  
Markers may be positioned vertically, but not horizontally. The three markers are  
identified by the type of dashed lines:  
H
H
H
Mark 1 has long dashes.  
Mark 2 has double dashes.  
Mark 3 has short dashes.  
Pressing the CLEAR MENU button removes the cursor selections, but the  
cursors, difference readout (voltage or time), and control assignments remain  
active and on screen. To restore the Cursor menu, press the CURSOR menu  
button again. To turn off the cursors, press the CURSOR button when the Cursor  
menu is displayed (two presses when the Cursor menu is not displayed).  
Variable Gain and Sweep  
with Cursors  
The Cursors are tied to the trace scaling. Hence, cursor measurements are  
accurate with Gain set to X5, X10, or Variable Gain.  
The various sweep modes are compatible with the Time Cursors. You can make  
Time Cursor measurements in any of the Sweep modes: 1-Line, 2-Line, 1-Field,  
or 2-Field. You may need to brighten the cursors and the trace by pressing the  
CRT MENU button and adjusting the intensity.  
Time Cursors measurements are possible with MAG on, though both cursors may  
be off screen. The measurements are accurate, even though you cannot see the  
3–13  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Time Cursors. Use the HORIZ POS knob to pan left or right to the cursor  
locations.  
Digital List (WFM 601M Only)  
The Digital List display lists the data values in sequence as they occur in the  
digital component video signal. Press the DGTL WFM/DGTL LIST button to  
enter the Digital List mode. Figure 3–13 shows an example of the Digital List  
display. You can use the data cursor, assigned to a bezel knob, to scroll through  
the data. The location of the data cursor in the Digital List display is correlated  
with the data cursor in the Digital Waveform and Parade display modes.  
Video/Data Selection  
The Video/Data bezel button chooses between two displays. Figure 3–13 shows  
the DATA mode. Figure 3–14 shows the VIDEO mode with the same data values  
as those in Figure 3–13. The VIDEO mode groups the samples in the order in  
which they occur in the data stream, CbYCrY’. The label above the grouped list  
indicates this order.  
@ 525/2:1  
DATA  
2FE  
30D  
2FE  
30D  
2FE  
30D  
2FE  
324  
2FD  
324  
312  
374  
364  
374  
3A6  
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
F1: 80  
VIDEO  
DATA  
SMP1160  
ACTIVE  
UPDATE  
FREEZE  
NEXT FIELD  
HEX  
DECIMAL  
BINARY  
LINE SEL  
SAMPLE  
Figure 3–13: Example of the Digital List display  
3–14  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Data Format  
Press the fourth bezel button to select the base used for displayed data from  
hexadecimal (h), decimal (d), or binary (b). The characters (h, d, or b) following  
the data indicates its base.  
@ 525/2:1  
Cb Y Cr Y’  
2FE  
h
F1: 80  
VIDEO  
DATA  
30D  
h
2FE  
h
h
h
h
SMP1160  
ACTIVE  
30D  
h
2FE  
h
UPDATE  
FREEZE  
30D  
h
2FE  
324  
2FD  
324  
h
h
h
NEXT FIELD  
312  
374  
364  
374  
3A6  
h
h
HEX  
DECIMAL  
BINARY  
h
LINE SEL  
SAMPLE  
Figure 3–14: Data List display mode in the Video mode  
Freeze/Update  
Press the second bezel button to select between active, video data and frozen  
data. Frozen data is not updated with current values from the video data stream.  
The Freeze mode stores six lines with three lines from each field. Use the Next  
Field bezel button to switch between fields.  
Line Select Settings  
In the Digital List display, Line Select is set to Sample by default. Use the bezel  
knobs labeled LINE and SAMPLE to select video lines and samples within a  
line. The current field and line appear at the upper left on the CRT. Use the Next  
Field bezel button to alternate between fields in a frame. The Sample knob  
scrolls to the end of the line then returns to the beginning of the line.  
3–15  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Digital Waveform (WFM 601M Only)  
The Digital Waveform display shows the component data samples as a wave-  
form. Press the DGTL WFM/DGTL LIST button to enter the Digital Waveform  
mode. Figure 3–15 shows an example of the Digital Waveform display. You can  
use the data cursor, assigned to a bezel knob, to scroll through the data wave-  
form. The data cursor remains centered while the data scrolls by. The location of  
the data cursor on the Digital Waveform display is correlated with the data cursor  
in the Digital List Display and with the sample select indicator or “blivit” in the  
Waveform and Parade Displays. For more information on the data cursor, refer to  
Line Select on page 3–39. The value of the current sample on each waveform  
appears above the waveform. The character (h, d, or b) following the value  
indicates its base.  
@ 525/2:1  
->Y’ 786  
d
F1: 80  
SMP1163  
ACTIVE  
Cb 804  
d
d
Cr 804  
LINE SEL  
SAMPLE  
Figure 3–15: Digital Waveform display in the VIDEO mode  
Video/Data Selection  
Use the VIDEO/DATA bezel button to select the format of the digital waveform.  
Figure 3–15 shows the VIDEO mode and Figure 3–16 shows the DATA mode.  
Note the DATA label at the top of the data cursor in Figure 3–16.  
The VIDEO mode displays the three video component channels, YCbCr, as  
separate waveforms. Any or all of the three channels may be displayed at one  
time. The channels are correctly time aligned so the data cursor shows the current  
sample values for each. Note that Y and Y’ samples are interleaved to create the  
CH 1 waveform. As you move the data cursor through the CH 1 data, the label  
3–16  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
will switch between Y and Y’. The symbol “–>” indicates the currently selected  
sample. The offset or broken data cursor seen in Figure 3–15 indicates that the Y’  
sample is selected and it is not aligned (nonco-sited) with the Cb and Cr channels.  
The Y sample is aligned or co-sited with Cb and Cr channels and its data cursor  
appears in line. Use the Video mode when selecting samples in the active picture  
area.  
The DATA mode displays the samples in sequence as they are received  
(Cb,Y,Cr,Y’). Use the Data mode to view sync words (EAV and SAV) and  
ancillary data.  
Output Monitor Signals  
The data cursor creates intersecting horizontal and vertical highlighted (or bright  
up) lines on the analog video output to indicate where in the video signal the data  
cursor is located. When you move the data cursor to the end of a line, the output  
picture shifts to show you the horizontal sync region. Likewise, when you move  
to the beginning or end of a frame, the vertical sync region shifts to the center of  
the screen. As you scroll through line samples, watch the location of the  
highlighted line on the output monitor. By doing so, you can correlate changes in  
the video signal with changes in the digital data values. To use the cross-hair  
cursor in the horizontal and vertical blanking regions, set EAV–SAV to PASS in  
the Configure WFM/VEC menu.  
@ 525/2:1  
F1: 176  
10mS/DIV  
DATA 274  
h
SMP 543  
ACTIVE  
LINE SEL  
SAMPLE  
Figure 3–16: Digital Waveform display in DATA mode  
3–17  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Gain Interactions  
Use the GAIN MENU function to magnify the vertical gain of a single channel  
by X5 or X10. Figure 3–17 shows CH 1 with X5 gain. Note the data cursor  
readout is for the “Y” channel with a value of 868 decimal.  
@ 525/2:1  
Y
868 d  
F1: 80  
X1  
X5  
SMP1165  
ACTIVE  
X10  
VARIABLE  
ON OFF  
LINE SEL  
SAMPLE  
Figure 3–17: Digital Waveform display showing X5 gain on CH 1 (Y) waveform  
Line Select Settings  
Choosing the Digital Waveform display forces Line Select to the Sample mode.  
Line Select in the Sample mode assigns two bezel knobs to select video lines and  
samples within a line. The current field and line readout appear at the upper left  
on the CRT. Press the Next Field bezel button to alternate between fields in a  
frame. The Sample knob scrolls to the end of the line then returns to the  
beginning of the line.  
3–18  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Eye Display (WFM 601E and WFM 601M Only)  
The Eye pattern display presents a voltage-versus-time waveform composed of  
multiple sweeps of the serial bit stream. You can measure the amplitude, rise  
time, aberrations, and jitter of the serial signal using the Eye pattern display.  
Select either the Serial A or B input for display and measurement. You can also  
choose to display the raw signal data (FLAT) or perform receiver equalization  
(EQ EYE) on the signal before display.  
Use the cursors to measure parameters of the Eye display. Refer to page 3–22 for  
instructions on using the cursors to measure the Eye display.  
EYE and EQ EYE Modes  
The EYE and EYE EQ modes allow measurement in short and long transmission  
line environments, respectively.  
On the WFM 601E, press the EYE/EQ EYE button to select the EYE or EQ EYE  
modes.  
On the WFM 601M, press EYE/JITTER button to select the EYE mode. Press  
the lower bezel button to alternate between the EYE and EQ EYE modes. If the  
EYE/EQ EYE selection is not visible when the EYE display is active, press the  
CLEAR MENU button.  
The EYE mode directly displays the serial signal applied to the rear panel  
loop-through input. This mode is best for directly monitoring a serial digital  
source or a short length of cable. When monitoring a signal near the end of a long  
cable run, the EYE mode might show what appears to be a band of noise. Use the  
EQ EYE mode to restore the signal shape and amplitude before display.  
The EQ EYE mode is best used to measure signals degraded by transmission  
through a long cable. The EQ EYE mode applies receiver equalization to the  
serial signal to restore it. Because equalization enhances the signal and causes  
signal peaking, it is best used to check signal continuity. You should regard EQ  
EYE display measurements as uncalibrated and merely qualitative.  
For the best measurements, use the EYE mode whenever possible. Use EQ EYE  
when the EYE mode fails to provide a useful signal.  
Clock BW Filters  
Both EYE pattern displays can attenuate low frequency jitter using one of three  
clock-recovery filters. Select from the 10 Hz, 100 Hz, and 1 kHz filters. Use  
these Clock BW filters to separate the medium and high frequency jitter from  
low frequency jitter. The filter frequencies indicate the –3 dB point. To access the  
filters, press the CONFIG button and select the EYE PATTERN menu. The  
10 Hz and 1 KHz filters allow jitter measurements according to the SMPTE  
RP-184 standard.  
The selected clock bandwidth filter appears in a readout field directly below the  
horizontal deflection factor.  
3–19  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Trigger Modes  
Two trigger or sweep modes are available with the Eye display: OVERLAY and  
10-EYE.  
OVERLAY. In OVERLAY mode, all bits of a serial word are overlaid at each eye  
location. Because numerous transitions for the data bits are overlaid, each eye  
crossing shows the timing jitter in the video system. Figure 3–18 shows the  
Overlay Eye display. Approximately three eyes are displayed and the horizontal  
scale is 1 ns/div.  
100 mV/DIV  
OVERLAY  
1 nS/DIV  
10 Hz  
Figure 3–18: Overlay Eye display  
3–20  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
10 EYE. In 10-EYE mode, every tenth bit of the serial signal appears at a fixed  
location on the display. Figure 3–19 shows the 10-EYE mode. Approximately  
10 eyes are displayed per horizontal sweep, and the horizontal scale is 3 ns/div.  
In the 10-Eye more, you can observe events that are correlated with the serial  
word rate or horizontal line rate. In this mode, you can also observe systematic  
errors that affect certain bits in the data word.  
100 mV/DIV  
10–EYE  
3 nS/DIV  
10 Hz  
Figure 3–19: 10-EYE triggered display  
To select the trigger mode, press the CONFIG button and use the bezel knob to  
select the EYE PATTERN menu. Press the DISPLAY bezel button to select  
OVERLAY or 10 EYE. The trigger mode is indicated by a readout in the upper  
left corner of the CRT. The trigger modes are available with both EYE and EYE  
EQ displays.  
Gain  
The calibrated vertical gain for the EYE and EQ EYE modes is 100 mV/div. You  
can expand the vertical scale by selecting X5, X10, or Variable gain. The vertical  
scale is displayed in the upper left corner of the CRT screen. Press the GAIN  
button to access the X5, X10, and Variable Gain gain selections. When Variable  
Gain is enabled, a “>” appears in front of the deflection factor to indicate the  
uncalibrated condition.  
3–21  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Eye Pattern  
Measurements  
This section describes how to measure parameters of the Eye pattern to verify  
standard signal specifications for serial digital transmission. The measurements  
discussed here are amplitude, aberrations, rise time, and jitter. Figure 3–20  
illustrates the initial equipment connections.  
Waveform Monitor  
(rear panel)  
Serial source  
75 W terminator  
SER A  
Output  
Loop-through input  
Figure 3–20: Connections for measuring a serial source  
Setup for Measurements. Perform the following steps in preparation for the Eye  
pattern measurements. Figure 3–20 illustrates the equipment connections.  
1. Connect the serial source to the monitor with a 75 W cable two meters or less  
in length. Use high quality, low loss coaxial cable, such as Belden 8281.  
2. Connect a 75 W terminator with at least 25 dB return loss to 300 MHz on the  
other end of the loop-through input.  
3. Set the serial source to output a 100% Color Bar signal.  
4. Press the EYE/JITTER button to select the Eye Pattern display.  
5. Press the GAIN MENU button and select 1X vertical gain.  
6. Adjust the vertical position so the bottom of the waveform rests on the –.1 V  
line.  
Measuring Amplitude. Measuring the signal amplitude can help you determine if  
the signal amplitude is too low due to cable losses or other system problems. This  
procedure shows you how to measure the signal amplitude using both the  
graticule and the Voltage Cursors. To measure the signal amplitude, follow these  
steps:  
1. Perform the initial settings for Eye measurements described on page 3–22.  
2. Select the desired input channel (SER A or B).  
3–22  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
3. Use either the OVERLAY or 10-EYE display mode. Press the CONFIG  
MENU button and select the EYE PATTERN menu to choose OVERLAY or  
10-EYE.  
4. Set CLOCK BW, in the Config EYE menu, to 1kHZ in order to reduce the  
effects of time jitter, which can obscure the amplitude measurement.  
5. For graticule measurement, select X1 vertical gain and make sure that  
variable gain is off. At X1 gain, the scale is 100 mV/div.  
6. Use the VERT POS knob to position the waveform bottom at the 0 V line. If  
the waveform exceeds 800 mV, position its bottom at the –.1, –.2, or –.3 V  
line. Measure the amplitude at a horizontal part of the waveform top line.  
7. Enable the Voltage Cursors.  
8. Position one cursor at the top horizontal part of the waveform; ignore any  
overshoot on the rising edge.  
9. Position the second cursor at the bottom of the waveform; ignore any  
undershoot. The Voltage Cursor readout gives the signal amplitude.  
10. For Cursor measurements, you can use any gain setting, including variable  
gain, since the waveform and the cursors are equally affected by the gain  
setting. Use higher gain settings, such as X5, to help match the cursor to the  
waveform.  
Signal sources should measure 800 mVp-p "10%. Signal amplitudes outside this  
range can degrade receiver performance.  
Measuring Aberrations. Serial sources should produce good signal transitions with  
a minimum of overshoot and ringing. Automatic equalizer circuits in receivers  
may be sensitive to aberrations greater than 10%.  
To measure aberrations, perform the following steps:  
1. Perform the initial settings for Eye measurements described on page 3–22.  
2. Enable the Voltage Cursors.  
3. Place one cursor at the peak of the overshoot and the other at the bottom of  
the topline of the waveform. Include any ringing (the oscillation following  
overshoot) in the measurement. Essentially, you are measuring the thickness  
of the top line of the waveform.  
4. Perform the same cursor measurement on the bottom line thickness,  
including any undershoot and ringing.  
5. Aberrations at the top or bottom line should not exceed 10% of the signal  
amplitude.  
3–23  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
The Eye display bandwidth of the waveform monitor is 450 MHz, so it can not  
display aberrations faster than this. Most receiver circuits are also bandwidth  
limited and usually ignore fast transients. This common bandwidth makes the  
waveform monitor a good indicator of problem sources in systems.  
Measuring Rise Time. Rise time measurements provide a check on the perfor-  
mance of sources and signal degradation by cabling.  
To measure rise time, perform the following steps:  
1. Perform the initial settings for Eye measurements described on page 3–22.  
2. Select Variable Gain and size the waveform to 10 major divisions.  
3. Use the Vert Pos bezel knob to position the bottom of the trace at the –.3 line  
and check that the top is aligned with the .7 V line.  
4. Enable the Timing Cursors.  
5. Align the cursors as shown in Figure 3–21. The first cursor is at the crossing  
of the rising edge and –.1 V line. The second cursor is at the crossing of the  
rising edge and the .5 V line. Use the horizontal MAG for greater accuracy  
when adjusting the cursors.  
6. The indicated nt time value is the standard 20 – 80% rise time measurement.  
>100mV/DIV  
OVERLAY  
nT  
.8nS  
0.5nS/DIV  
1 kHz  
.8  
.7  
.6  
.5  
.4  
.3  
.2  
.1  
100%  
50%  
–.1  
–.2  
–.3  
Figure 3–21: Timing Cursors alignment for measuring 20–80% rise time  
3–24  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Calculating Actual Rise Time. The waveform monitor Eye display has a bandwidth  
of 450 MHz which equates to a 20 – 80% rise time of 500 ps. Consider this finite  
rise time when you measure the displayed rise time. You can calculate the actual  
rise time of the source being measured using the following formula:  
TR(source)  
=
(TR(measured))2–(0.5ns)2  
Ǹ
T
R(source) = the actual 20 – 80% rise time of the source (in ns);  
TR(measured) = the 20 – 80% rise time measured on the waveform monitor (in ns)  
Table 3–1 lists actual rise times for a number of rise time values measured with  
the waveform monitor.  
Table 3–1: List of measured and actual rise times for the  
waveform monitor  
20–80% rise time measured  
Actual 20–80% rise time  
400 ps  
640 ps  
710 ps  
780 ps  
860 ps  
900 ps  
940 ps  
1.0 ns  
1.1 ns  
1.2 ns  
1.3 ns  
1.4 ns  
1.5 ns  
1.6 ns  
500 ps  
600 ps  
700 ps  
750 ps  
800 ps  
900 ps  
1.0 ns  
1.1 ns  
1.2 ns  
1.3 ns  
1.4 ns  
1.5 ns  
3–25  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Measuring Jitter. The Eye display in Overlaid mode provides a quick way to  
measure timing jitter. The WFM 601M waveform monitor also provides an  
automated Jitter measurement described on page 3–37.  
Timing jitter is the deviation of signal transitions compared to those of a  
reference clock. Ideally, all data bit transitions occur at equal intervals. In real  
systems, factors such as noise, pulse distortion, and variations in bit patterns  
cause timing jitter. Jitter results in Eye closure along the time axis, narrowing the  
window in which the data values can be accurately determined. Data errors result  
when the Eye becomes too narrow.  
Jitter is characterized by both its magnitude and frequency. Signal transitions  
deviate from their ideal position by a peak amount and at one or more frequen-  
cies, depending on the sources. The frequency of the jitter is important in  
determining its effect on the system. Typically, only high frequency jitter affects  
data recovery. But low frequency jitter can affect time-critical operations such as  
signal multiplexing and D/A conversion.  
The waveform monitor provides three bandwidth filters: 10 Hz, 100 Hz, and  
1 kHz. These filters only show jitter terms above the selected filter frequency.  
For example, with 1 kHz selected, 50 Hz jitter is heavily attenuated while 10 kHz  
jitter appears unattenuated.  
To measure timing jitter with the waveform monitor, perform the following steps:  
1. Perform the initial settings for Eye measurements described on page 3–22.  
2. Choose the OVERLAY display mode (located in the EYE PATTERN  
CONFIGure menu). In this mode, each of the ten bits of a scrambled serial  
word are overlaid in the same location, showing peak jitter at each eye  
crossing.  
3. Select the appropriate BW Limit filter. Take two measurements: one with the  
10 Hz filter, showing total broadband jitter, and one with the 1 kHz filter,  
which removes the low-frequency jitter.  
4. Enable the Timing Cursors.  
5. Position the cursors to measure the Eye zero-crossing point.  
6. Set Gain to X5 for better vertical resolution; use SWEEP MAG for better  
horizontal resolution.  
Suggested limits for jitter are 740 ps p-p over one horizontal line, measured with  
the 1 kHz BW Limit filter. If composite D/A conversion is planned, use the  
10 Hz BW Limit filter and the same 740 ps p-p limit.  
To date, many of the jitter problems in systems have been the result of genlock-  
ing clocks to other references such as the horizontal synchronization pulse.  
Reference jitter transferred by genlocks into a serial system is typically between  
20 and several hundred hertz. Also, the phase detection process used by the  
3–26  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
genlock can add noise, which results in jitter in the 10 Hz to 1 kHz range. By  
using the appropriate BW Limit filter, genlock jitter can be included or rejected  
from a jitter measurement.  
Observing Word Correlated Behavior. The Eye Pattern display in 10-Eye mode  
allows you to analyze word correlated jitter. When video is serialized, a 270 MHz  
serial clock is derived from the 27 MHz rate parallel word clock. Often there is  
slight phase modulation of the serial clock between the transitions of the parallel  
clock producing jitter at data-bit transitions. This jitter is not random; it is  
correlated to the parallel word rate. Also, the video pattern applied to the  
serializer changes at a 27 MHz rate or at an integer fraction of this rate. Any  
video pattern related effects in the serial system typically appear at fixed data-bit  
locations with respect to the parallel word.  
In the Eye display10-EYE mode, the trigger is on the parallel word boundaries,  
with 10 Eyes shown per sweep. Parallel word and tv-line correlated behavior can  
be seen in this mode. If a serial system has a disturbance that appears related to  
video patterns, either word or tv-line, use the 10-EYE mode in either EYE or EQ  
EYE to analyze the problem. Use the Line Select function to place the area of  
interest in the Eye pattern display.  
Filter Menu  
The Filter menu provides selection of input signal filters for the Waveform and  
Parade display modes. The three available filters are FLAT (unfiltered), LPASS  
(1 MHz low pass filter), and the DIFF (differentiated steps filter).  
Pressing CLEAR MENU turns off the filter selection readout. To turn off the  
Filter selection and leave the Filter menu, press the FILTER button (press the  
button twice if the Filter menu is not displayed). Leaving the FILTER menu  
returns the monitor to the unfiltered (FLAT) setting.  
3–27  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Gain Menu  
The GAIN menu allows you to expand the display vertically by set levels or to  
vary it continuously. The expanded waveform lets you inspect a waveform  
feature or more precisely position a cursor for a measurement.  
Press the GAIN MENU button to access the Gain menu. Use the fixed bezel  
buttons to select from the gain settings of X1, X5, X10, and Variable gain. Gain  
is useful in all display modes except PICTURE mode. In Vector displays,  
variable gain changes both horizontal and vertical gain equally. Lightning and  
Diamond displays have both horizontal and vertical variable gain.  
CLEAR MENU turns off all of the menu readout, except the VAR GAIN label.  
Variable gain remains active as long as the front-panel GAIN indicator is lit.  
To turn Gain off, press the GAIN button once (twice if the Gain menu is not  
visible). When you quit the Gain menu, Variable gain returns to the calibrated  
setting and Vertical gain returns to X1.  
3–28  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Gamut Displays  
The waveform monitor features two types of gamut displays. The Diamond  
display checks video signals for proper RGB gamut. The Arrowhead display  
checks composite-coded video signals. Both gamut, or signal limit, displays can  
trigger an alarm when the input signal exceeds a gamut limit.  
Press the VECTOR/GAMUT button to select GAMUT. Use the bottom bezel  
button to select either the Diamond or Arrowhead display mode. This selection  
may not be visible when other MENU functions, such as GAIN, are active. Press  
the CLEAR SCREEN button to remove other function menus.  
Diamond Display  
The Diamond display is very effective at showing the relationship between the R,  
G, and B signal video signals. The waveform monitor converts the Y, Pb, and Pr  
components recovered from the serial signal to R, G, and B to form the Diamond  
display. Figure 3–22 shows how the Diamond plot is developed.  
Ultimately all color video signals are coded as RGB for display on a picture  
monitor. To predictably display all three components, they must lie between peak  
white, 700 mV, and black, 0 V. Picture monitors handle excursions outside the  
standard range (gamut) in different ways.  
+700 mV  
Legal G and B space  
G
B
R
Green  
Green  
0 V  
0 V  
Blue  
Red  
+700 mV  
+700 mV  
G
Legal G and R space  
+700 mV  
X–Y plot  
Diamond plot  
Figure 3–22: Construction of the Diamond display  
3–29  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Checking RGB Gamut. For a signal to be in gamut, all signal vectors must lie  
within the G-B and G-R diamonds. Conversely, if a vector extends outside the  
diamond, it is out of gamut. The direction of an excursion out of gamut indicates  
which signal is excessive. Errors in green amplitude affect both diamonds  
equally, while blue amplitude errors affect only the top diamond and red errors  
affect only the bottom diamond. You can set an alarm to indicate when the signal  
exceeds the RGB gamut. For information on setting the gamut alarm, refer to  
Gamut Alarms on page 3–33.  
The intensity of a vector indicates its duration. A momentary out-of-gamut  
condition appears as a faint trace. Long duration violations show as a bright  
trace. Figure 3–23 gives some sample out-of-gamut signals on the Diamond  
display.  
On the Diamond Display, monochrome signals appear as vertical lines. Nonlinear  
component processing, such as from a gamma corrector that alters white balance,  
can cause deviations along the vertical axis.  
As with the lightning display, bending of the transitions indicates timing delays.  
When a color bar signal is applied, the vertical axis becomes an indicator of  
delay errors.  
Example A:  
R – Ok  
G > 700 mV  
B – Ok  
Example B:  
R – Ok  
G – Ok  
Example C:  
R – Ok  
G – Ok, 350 mV  
B < 0 mV  
B > 700 mV  
Figure 3–23: Out-of-gamut signals on a Diamond display  
3–30  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Arrowhead Gamut  
The Arrowhead gamut display plots luminance (Y) against chrominance (C) to  
check if the composite signal adheres to standard gamut. Figure 3–24 shows  
NTSC and PAL Arrowhead displays (75% Color bars) and indicates the values of  
the graticule lines. The arrow-head shape of the graticule results from overlaying  
the standard limits for luminance and luminance plus peak chrominance.  
NTSC display  
100 IRE  
120 IRE  
131 IRE  
NTSC  
120 IRE  
Current alarm  
level setting  
Alarm level  
cursor  
Y Ampl  
Y
–40 IRE  
| C |  
C Ampl  
PAL display  
700 mV  
950 mV  
PAL  
700 mV  
Current alarm  
level setting  
Alarm level  
cursor  
Y Ampl  
Y
–300 mV  
| C |  
C Ampl  
Figure 3–24: NTSC and PAL Arrowhead gamut displays  
3–31  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Signals exceeding the luminance amplitude gamut extend above the top  
horizontal limit (top electronic graticule line). Signals exceeding the luminance  
plus peak chrominance amplitude gamut extend beyond the upper and lower  
diagonal limits. The bottom horizontal line shows the minimum allowed  
luminance level of 7.5 IRE for NTSC and 0 mV for PAL. See Figure 3–24.  
Graticule Format. The electronic graticule is different for PAL and NTSC formats.  
Use the CONFIG GAMUT menu to select the Limit Format. The AUTO  
selection in the Gamut Configure menu determines the correct graticule from  
your input signal. A field rate of 60 Hz indicates NTSC and 50 Hz indicates PAL.  
NTSC and PAL Limit Cursors. The alarm limit cursor sets the upper amplitude  
point at which an alarm is triggered. In Figure 3–24, the NTSC limit cursor is set  
to 120 IRE, as indicated at the upper right of the Arrowhead graticule. Set the  
NTSC limit cursor to 100, 110, 120, or 131 IRE to fit your operating practices.  
Likewise set the PAL limit cursor to 700 mV or 950 mV. Use the CONFIG  
GAMUT menu to set the gamut level.  
For information on setting the gamut alarm, refer to Gamut Alarms on  
page 3–33.  
Checking Composite Gamut. The Arrowhead display provides an automated  
check on adherence to RGB or composite gamut standards with the Alarm  
feature discussed on page 3–33. To perform an automated gamut check, enable  
the alarm and set the level. The automated check alerts you whenever the signal  
exceeds the set limit.  
Another useful Arrowhead function is a measure of how well the active video  
signal is using the dynamic range of video channel. A properly adjusted signal  
should be centered in the arrowhead graticule and have transitions that approach  
all the limits.  
3–32  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Gamut Alarms  
The Gamut display modes can alert you whenever a signal exceeds a selected  
limit. You can set alarm limits for both the Diamond RGB display and Arrow-  
head composite display. The alarm can take the form of an alarm message in the  
lower left corner of the CRT or a flashing of the MON OUT signal.  
To set either the RGB or composite alarm, follow these steps:  
1. Press the CONFIG button and select the GAMUT menu.  
2. Select the type of GAMUT CHECK from these choices:  
H
H
CMPST (composite) for the Arrowhead display  
RGB for the Diamond display. RGB mode checks the R, G, and B  
signals for transitions below 0 mV and above 700 mV.  
H
BOTH enables RGB and CMPST gamut checks.  
3. Select the type of ALARM DISP (display) you want from:  
H
H
SCREEN places an error message at the lower left of the CRT.  
PIX MON flashes the analog output monitor signal in the area that  
exceeds the limits.  
H
BOTH enables both SCREEN and PIX MON alarm displays.  
4. Set the adjustable limit cursor to 100, 110, 120, or 131 IRE for NTSC or  
700 mV or 950 mV for PAL.  
When an alarm condition occurs, a message appears or the monitor flashes for at  
least one second. In addition, pin 16 of the Remote rear panel connector is pulsed  
low. Refer to Remote Connector discussion on page B–2 for more information.  
3–33  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Graticule Measurements  
The waveform monitor provides an internal etched graticule for waveform  
measurements. The internal graticule scales are on the same plane as the CRT  
phosphor to reduce parallax errors. You can adjust the graticule and trace  
illumination in the CRT menu for viewing or photographing the display.  
Figure 3–25 shows the etched graticule.  
Upper limit for 75% color diff signals  
Center line for 75% and 100%  
color diff signals  
Lower limit for 75% color diff signals  
0 V horizontal reference  
mV scale  
Figure 3–25: Waveform measurement graticule  
Vertical Scale  
This etched scale facilitates direct Waveform and Parade measurements. The  
vertical scale is marked in millivolts (mV) and extends from –300 mV to  
+800 mV in 100 mV increments.  
There are three dashed lines on the graticule used to measure the color difference  
signals, Pb and Pr. The line at 50% amplitude is the center line for the color  
difference signal measurements. The lines at 90 mV and 610 mV correspond to  
the peak excursions for 75% color difference signals. 100% color difference  
signals extend from the baseline (0 V) to 700 mV, centered on the 50% graticule  
line.  
3–34  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
K-Factor Graticule. A special graticule located at the top of the etched graticule  
allows measurement of K-Factor line-time distortion. Figure 3–26 shows the  
special graticule and how to align a 2T Bar waveform to measure time-line  
distortion.  
The graticule does not include the first and last 1 ms of the bar where short-time  
distortions (ringing, overshoot, undershoot, etc.) occur. The solid outer box  
equals a 4% K factor, while the dashed-line inner box equals a 2% K factor.  
K-factor  
graticule  
Waveform  
alignment  
points  
Figure 3–26: Graticule for K-factor measurements  
To measure the K-factor distortion follow these steps:  
1. Apply a 700 mV 2T bar signal with a 26 ms duration bar to the active Serial  
input.  
2. Adjust the waveform so its bottom is on the 0 V line and its top is on the  
700 mV line. If necessary, adjust the Variable Gain in the GAIN menu so the  
waveform spans the 0 V to 700 mV lines. Note the rising and falling edges of  
the waveform must align with the marks on the 50% line.  
3. After initial alignment, measure the largest deviation of the bar top (tilt or  
rounding) using the K–factor graticule. You can expand the waveform by  
setting Gain to X5. The K factor graticule lines then measure 0.8% and 0.4%  
K factor.  
3–35  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
2T Pulse to Bar. 2T pulse-to-bar measurements are made using the solid and  
dashed lines located to the left of the K-Factor graticule. Setup is the same as for  
K-Factor measurement. The 2T pulse-to-bar graticule lines are scaled according  
to the following formula:  
1
and  
1
(1–4K)  
(1+4K)  
Where:  
K = 0.02 for 2% K Factor (using the dashed lines)  
or  
K = 0.04 for 4% K Factor (using the solid lines)  
Set Gain to X5 to increase the resolution to 0.4% and 0.8%.  
Horizontal Scale  
The horizontal reference line (0 V) is also referred to as the base line, 0 mV,  
blanking level, and black level. The reference line has 12 major divisions. Main  
marks at the 1st, 6th, and 11th divisions provide for timing and linearity  
measurements, which should occur within the center ten divisions. When the  
Sweep button is set to 1-Line, each major division represents 5 ms, and when set  
to 2-Line sweep, each major division represents 10 ms. The current deflection  
factor is displayed in the upper-right corner of the CRT.  
Pressing the MAG button magnifies the sweep so the scale on the baseline equals  
500 ns per major division for 1-Line sweep and 1 ms per major division in 2-Line  
sweep. Use the HORIZ POS knob to view the waveform extremes when  
magnified.  
3–36  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Jitter Measurement Display (WFM 601M Only)  
The Jitter display mode provides an automatic peak-to-peak measure of time  
jitter on the active SER A or B input signal. Selectable high-pass filters allow  
you to distinguish between high and low frequency jitter. Figure 3–27 shows an  
example of the Jitter display including a sample jitter waveform. The jitter mode  
converts any phase modulation to amplitude and plots it against time. An  
unfiltered version of the jitter waveform appears on the JITTER OUT BNC  
connector on the rear-panel.  
Jitter measurements appear in the Jitter measurement box. The left measurement  
is Timing or wideband peak-to-peak jitter from 10 Hz to 5 MHz. The right  
measurement gives filtered peak-to-peak jitter measured after the high-pass filter.  
The selected high-pass filter is indicated above the filtered jitter measurement.  
0.1 UI/DIV  
2 FIELD  
10HZ  
High-pass filter  
JITTER (P-P)  
TIMING  
0.16UI  
10HZ HPF  
0.17UI  
Jitter p-p out of  
high-pass filter  
Wideband p-p  
jitter  
Jitter waveform  
after the  
high-pass filter  
Figure 3–27: Example of the Jitter display  
3–37  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Jitter Demodulation  
The Jitter measurement uses a demodulator method to determine signal jitter. The  
serial clock is recovered from the input signal and multiplied (demodulated)  
against a very stable oscillator, which translates any phase modulation (jitter) into  
a DC value. The resulting DC values plotted against time is proportional to jitter  
in the serial signal. This jitter waveform is passed through a high-pass filter and  
applied to a peak detector. The peak detector measurement is presented in the  
jitter measurement box seen in Figure 3–27. The demodulator can detect jitter up  
to 5 MHz.  
Jitter Measurement  
Configuration  
The Jitter measurement lets you pick one of four high-pass filters and set the  
readout units. Press the CONFIG MENU button and select JITTER. Use the  
JITTER HPF bezel button to select from the available filters: 10 Hz, 1 kHz,  
10 kHz, and 100 kHz. The jitter readout displays in seconds (SEC) or unit  
intervals (UI). Use the READOUT bezel button select the unit type or turn off  
the readout.  
You can display the jitter waveform using any of the LINE/FIELD sweep  
selections. You can also use the Line Select function to view an individual line.  
Vertical Gain and horizontal MAG are available to enhance your view of the  
jitter waveform. Use the Voltage Cursors to measure specific parts of the jitter  
waveform. The Jitter Config menu READOUT selection determines the units for  
the Voltage Cursors.  
3–38  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Line Select  
The Line Select menu lets you select the part of the extracted video signal to  
display and measure. You can select one line, 15 lines, or a single sample on any  
line in any field. The selected part is indicated on the MON OUT signals as  
highlighted video.  
A readout in the upper left of the CRT indicates the currently selected field, line,  
and sample. For example, the display F1:22, SMP1441 means that field 1, line 22  
and sample 1441 is selected. In 15 H mode, starting and ending line numbers are  
given. In 525 line standard with field 2 selected, sequential line numbers appear  
in parenthesis.  
To set the Line Select mode, press the LIN SEL MENU button. The Line Select  
menu appears offering control selections. Bezel knobs are assigned to select line  
number and sample (in SAMPLE mode).  
Field Selection  
The bezel buttons FIELD and NEXT FIELD select the field from which the  
selected line/sample is taken. Selecting ALL displays the same line number from  
both fields in a frame. The “1 of 2” selection lets you choose a line from only one  
field in a frame. Press the NEXT FIELD button repeatedly to cycle through the  
fields in a frame.  
Line or Sample Selection  
The second bezel button allows selection of 1H, 15H, and SAMPLE  
(WFM 601M only) display modes. In 1H mode, select a single horizontal line  
from anywhere in a frame. On the output monitor, the single selected line will be  
highlighted. When the selected line is near the top or bottom of the frame, the  
output monitor signal shifts to show the vertical sync region.  
In the 15H mode you select a range of lines using the bezel knob. On the output  
monitor, a band of lines is highlighted. The output monitor signal does not shift  
as with the 1H and SAMPLE modes.  
In the SAMPLE mode, select a horizontal line and a specific sample on that line.  
In the Waveform and Parade Displays, a rectangular marker or “blivit” shows the  
selected sample on the waveform. On the output monitor, highlighted horizontal  
and vertical lines intersect at the selected sample. In the SAMPLE mode, the  
output monitor display shifts to show the sync region when your selection  
approaches either end of a line or field. Selections in the sample mode are  
correlated across most display modes, such as Digital Waveform, Digital Data,  
Parade, and Waveform display. For example, you can align the blivit to the SAV  
sample in the Parade mode, then switch to the Digital Waveform mode and see  
the SAV value in the data stream.  
3–39  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
A special condition exists in 15H mode when you select the PARADE or  
WAVEFORM displays. The first line in the display corresponds with the LIN  
SEL readout. The second is from the second line and the third is from the third  
line in the sequence. See Figure 3–28. For more information on how line select  
affects the Parade mode, refer to page 3–41.  
Line 1  
Line 2  
Line 3  
Figure 3–28: Parade display of YPbPr shown in Line Select mode (15H only)  
The CLEAR MENU button removes the readout associated with the line  
selection, but the line number readout and Line Sel control assignment remain  
active on screen. To restore the menu readout, press the LINE SEL menu button  
again. To turn off the function press the LINE SEL menu button when the menu  
readout is displayed; press LIN SEL twice when the menu is not displayed.  
3–40  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Multiple Display  
Parade Display  
The Multiple display allows you to overlay two display modes. When the  
Waveform or Parade mode is displayed, you can add either the Vector, Lightning,  
or Diamond displays. When you exit the Multiple display, the previous display is  
restored.  
Display the component signals Y (CH 1), Pb (CH2), and Pr (CH 3) using the  
Parade display. You can choose to display one, two, or all three waveforms at  
once. Measure the waveforms using the graticule or Cursors.  
Gain and Sweep selections operate as in the Waveform display. Gain selections  
are available to expand the waveforms vertically to aid in measurement. The  
LINE/FIELD button alternates between one line and one field. The MAG  
selection expands the horizontal scale, while still allowing you to take Cursor  
timing measurements.  
Figure 3–29: Parade display of Y and Pb signals  
When Line Select is set to 1H and Ref is internal, the CH 1, CH 2, and CH 3  
waveforms are all from the same line. When Line Select is set to 15H or Ref is  
external, CH 1 is from line n, CH 2 is from line n+1, and CH 3 is from line n+2.  
3–41  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Picture Display  
The Picture display shows a monochrome version of the video signal carried by  
the serial digital input signal. Figure 3–30 shows an example of a color bar  
signal. The Picture display lets you verify the signal source. When Line Select is  
active, the highlight or “bright-up” of the selected line appears as it would on an  
external analog monitor.  
.8  
.7  
.6  
.5  
.4  
.3  
.2  
.1  
100%  
50%  
–.1  
–.2  
–.3  
Tek  
PB  
Figure 3–30: Example of the Picture display  
To adjust the Picture display, press the CRT MENU button and use the CON-  
TRAST and BLACK LEVEL bezel knobs.  
3–42  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Presets  
The Preset menu makes it possible to recall front-panel settings from a list of 10  
stored front-panel presets. You can store up to nine front-panel presets at these  
locations. The remaining one is factory programmed to help calibrate the  
waveform monitor.  
Preset Menu  
Press the PRESET MENU button to access the list of the 10 presets. The list  
appears over a bezel knob below the CRT. Rotating this knob moves the highlight  
box up or down the list. Once the desired preset is selected, you can take one of  
four actions:  
RECALL. Sets the front panel to the stored settings previously stored into that  
memory location.  
STORE. Wipes out the currently stored settings, in the selected memory location,  
and replaces them with the current front–panel settings.  
RENAME. Allows you to change the name of the current preset selection using a  
set of alpha-numeric characters and symbols.  
RECOVER. Returns to the previously selected choice. For example, assume that  
Preset 1 was the previous choice and Preset 8 has now been selected but not  
recalled. Pressing RECOVER returns to Preset 1.  
To restore the Preset menu, press the PRESET menu button again. To turn off the  
Recall function, press CLEAR MENU or the PRESET menu button.  
Rename Submenu  
Use the Preset Rename submenu to rename one of the nine Presets.  
1. Rotate the Location bezel knob to select a character to change in the current  
name.  
2. Rotate the Letter bezel knob to scroll through the list of available characters.  
The Location character changes as you scroll through the character list. The  
blank character follows the letter Z.  
3. When you are done, press the ACCEPT button to lock the selection.  
4. Press the RETURN bezel button to return to the PRESET menu.  
3–43  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Ref Mode  
The REF button selects the synchronization reference. The default reference is  
the currently selected serial digital input (SER A or B). Press the REF button  
once to select the external reference input (EXT REF). The EXT indicator,  
located just above the REF button, lights when the external reference is selected.  
The EXT REF input is a 75 W loop-through input. The external reference signal  
can be a black burst or composite video signal.  
Press the REF button again to select the internal synchronization reference and  
turn off the EXT indicator.  
Serial Status  
The Serial format display performs automatic checks on the serial digital signal  
and provides descriptive status of the input signal. Two Serial format screens,  
STATUS and FORMAT, display information about the serial signal. In addition,  
the front-panel EDH indicator lights when the input signal contains valid EDH  
information in accordance with the SMPTE RP-165 standard.  
Press the SERIAL button (located below the Alarm indicator) to view the Serial  
format screens. Figure 3–31 shows the STATUS screen. Press the DISPLAY  
bezel button to select either the STATUS, FORMAT, or CABLE screen. V1.X  
firmware instruments do not have the CABLE selection. Press the SERIAL  
button to exit the Serial format display.  
3–44  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
STATUS Screen  
The Status screen presents a signal description, the results of EDH checks, and  
the cable length. Figure 3–31 shows an example of the Status screen displaying a  
signal with a 525-line rate, 10 bit data, and 16 channels of embedded audio.  
Figure 3–32 shows the STATUS screen for firmware V1.X instruments.  
SIGNAL PRESENT  
525 LINES  
10 BITS  
AUDIO:  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
FORMAT ERROR  
OTHER ANC DATA  
STUCK BITS:  
--L-L-L-L-  
DISPLAY  
STATUS  
FORMAT  
CABLE  
FF CRC ERR SEC  
STATUS  
0
VALID  
AP CRC ERR SEC  
STATUS  
1
VALID  
F1 AP CRC VALUE  
F2 AP CRC VALUE  
CHANGED SINCE RESET  
10AB  
10AB  
YES  
0 DAYS  
00:02:50  
ELAPSED TIME  
RESET  
Figure 3–31: Serial STATUS display for firmware V2.X  
The status screen provides three types of information. The information at the top  
describes the type of detected signal including the number of lines, data bits, and  
audio channels. The Stuck Bits readout shows the status of each bit in the data  
word with the LSB on the right. Three characters indicate the status of each bit:  
H
H
H
“–” for bits that change during a field  
L indicates bits that stay low  
H for bits that stay high  
The table on the Status screen contains EDH (SMPTE RP-165) and CRC error  
detection results. The elapsed time indicates the sample period for the error  
detection readout.  
3–45  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Features of the Status Screen. The Status screen features operate as follows:  
H
Signal Present. Indicates when a valid serial digital signal is detected. When  
the serial receiver detects a no-signal condition, the status will read SIGNAL  
MISSING.  
H
H
H
525/625 Lines. Gives the number of lines in the serial digital signal.  
10/8 Bits. Gives the number of data bits in the serial digital signal.  
Audio. Gives the number of embedded audio channels detected in the serial  
digital signal. When the serial digital signal does not contain audio informa-  
tion, the AUDIO readout disappears.  
H
Format Error. (WFM 601E and WFM 601M only) Indicates a format error is  
present. To see the type of format error, press the DISPLAY bezel button to  
select FORMAT.  
H
H
Other ANC Data. (WFM 601E and WFM 601M only) Indicates the presence  
of ancillary data other than EDH or Audio.  
Stuck Bits. (WFM 601E and WFM 601M only) Indicate if any of the 8 or 10  
data bits are locked. The LSB is on the right. Active bits are indicated by a  
hyphen and locked bits by an L for the low state and H for high.  
H
H
FF CRC ERR SEC (full field CRC errored seconds). Provides an EDH  
(SMPTE RP-165) measure of asynchronous errored seconds based on CRC  
calculated for each field in the video signal.  
AP CRC ERR SEC (active picture CRC errored seconds). Provides an EDH  
(SMPTE RP-165) measure of asynchronous errored seconds based on CRC  
calculated for the active picture part of each video field.  
H
H
H
F1 AP CRC VALUE (active picture CRC value). Calculates the AP CRC  
value for the active video part of field one.  
F2 AP CRC VALUE (active picture CRC value). Calculates the AP CRC  
value for the active video part of field two.  
Changed Since Reset. Indicates if either the F1 or F2 AP CRC VALUE has  
changed since you last reset the timer.  
H
H
H
Elapsed Time. Gives the time since you last reset the timer.  
Reset. Sets the elapsed time back to zero and clears any detected EDH errors.  
Display. (WFM 601E and WFM 601M only) Selects either STATUS,  
FORMAT, or CABLE screens.  
3–46  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Status Screen for V1.X  
Firmware  
The WFM 601M with V1.X firmware includes cable length and signal strength  
readouts in the Status screen as shown in Figure 3–32. The other information in  
the STATUS screen is the same as that shown in Figure 3–31.  
SIGNAL PRESENT  
525 LINES  
10 BITS  
AUDIO:  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
FORMAT ERROR  
OTHER ANC DATA  
STUCK BITS:  
--L-L-L-L-  
DISPLAY  
STATUS  
FORMAT  
FF CRC ERR SEC  
STATUS  
0
VALID  
AP CRC ERR SEC  
STATUS  
1
VALID  
F1 AP CRC VALUE  
F2 AP CRC VALUE  
CHANGED SINCE RESET  
10AB  
10AB  
YES  
CABLE TYPE  
BELDEN 8281  
BELDEN 1694  
BELDEN 1505  
0 DAYS  
00:02:50  
ELAPSED TIME  
RESET  
SERIAL SIGNAL LEVEL:  
0.00 dB  
APPROX CABLE LENGTH:  
0 METERS  
Figure 3–32: Serial STATUS display for firmware V1.X  
The V1.X firmware Status screen includes cable measurement features. With  
V2.X firmware, these features moved to the DISPLAY CABLE screen. The  
V1.X features provide the following information:  
H
CABLE TYPE. Select the type of cable connecting the video source to the  
waveform monitor. The correct Cable Type is necessary to calculate the  
Serial Signal Level and Cable Length.  
H
SERIAL SIGNAL LEVEL. Indicates the amplitude of the signal source  
relative to the 800 mV standard. The value 0 dB indicates a good 800 mV  
signal. A value of –3 dB would indicate a source with 0.707 of the expected  
amplitude. To get an accurate measurement, you must select the correct  
CABLE TYPE for your installation.  
H
APPROXIMATE CABLE LENGTH. Indicates the length of the cable  
between the signal source and the waveform monitor. The waveform monitor  
calculates the cable length based on the signal power at the input. To get an  
accurate measurement, you must select the correct CABLE TYPE for your  
installation.  
3–47  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
FORMAT Screen  
(WFM 601E and  
WFM 601M Only)  
The FORMAT screen presents the results of six signal format checks. A given  
check reports back either OK or ERROR. The waveform monitor continuously  
performs the format checks. The results are not saved or latched; once an error  
condition clears, the indicator returns to OK. The FORMAT screen is identical  
for V1.X and V2.X firmware except for the CABLE selection for the DISPLAY  
bezel button.  
SIGNAL PRESENT  
525 LINES  
10 BITS  
DATA RANGE  
OK  
OK  
OK  
OK  
DISPLAY  
STATUS  
FORMAT  
CABLE  
SAV PLACEMENT  
LINE LENGTH  
FIELD LENGTH  
ANC CHECKSUM  
ANC PARITY  
OK  
OK  
Figure 3–33: Serial format display showing the FORMAT screen  
Features of the Format Screen. The Format screen provide the following  
information:  
H
H
H
H
H
Data Range. Indicates an error if the reserved values of 000h–003h or  
3FCh–3FFh are used incorrectly.  
Sav Placement. Indicates an error if SAV is improperly placed with respect to  
the preceding EAV.  
Line Length. Indicates an error if there are an incorrect number of samples  
from one EAV to the next.  
Field Length. Indicates an error if there are an incorrect number of lines in a  
field.  
ANC Parity. Indicates an error if a parity error has occurred in ancillary data.  
3–48  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
H
ANC Checksum. Indicates an error if an ancillary data checksum error has  
occurred  
CABLE Screen  
(WFM 601E and  
WFM 601M Only)  
The CABLE screen displays signal level and cable length readouts and allows  
you to select the cable type used in your installation. See Figure 3–34. This  
screen appears only with firmware V2.X and later.  
SIGNAL PRESENT  
525 LINES  
10 BITS  
DISPLAY  
SOURCE SIGNAL LEVEL:  
APPROX CABLE LENGTH:  
CABLE LOSS:  
100 %  
0 METERS  
0.00 dB  
STATUS  
FORMAT  
CABLE  
CABLE TYPE  
BELDEN 8281  
BELDEN 1694  
BELDEN 1505  
Figure 3–34: Serial format display showing the Cable screen  
Features of the Cable Screen. The CABLE screen provides the following  
information:  
H
H
SOURCE SIGNAL LEVEL. Indicates the level of the signal source relative  
to the 800 mV standard. To get an accurate measurement, you must select the  
correct CABLE TYPE for your installation.  
APPROX CABLE LENGTH. Displays the cable length between the signal  
source and the waveform monitor. The waveform monitor calculates the  
cable length based on the input signal power and the cable type. To get an  
accurate measurement, you must select the correct CABLE TYPE for your  
installation.  
H
CABLE LOSS. Displays the approximate loss of power due to the cable. To  
get an accurate measurement, you must select the correct CABLE TYPE for  
your installation.  
3–49  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
H
H
DISPLAY. Selects either STATUS, FORMAT, or CABLE screens.  
CABLE TYPE. Selects the type of cable connecting the signal source to the  
waveform monitor. The Cable Type sets parameters needed to calculate the  
Source Signal Level and Approx. Cable Length. Press the CABLE TYPE  
bezel button to select the correct cable type for your installation.  
Measuring Error Rate  
The waveform monitor provides two methods for measuring data transmission  
errors in serial video systems. The first method uses the Error Detection and  
Handling (EDH) system which documented by the SMPTE RP165 standard. The  
second uses a fixed pattern test signal and the Active Picture CRC values.  
Error Rate Measurement with EDH. The EDH system computes a Cyclic Redun-  
dancy Code (CRC) for each field of video and includes it with the video in an  
ancillary data field. At the EDH receiver, a CRC is calculated for the received  
field of video and compared against the transmitted CRC. If they do not match,  
then one or more errors have occurred during that video field.  
To measure a serial digital link, the source must insert EDH information. Serial  
repeaters or processing equipment between the source and the destination  
receiver must pass ancillary data on the lines where the EDH is inserted. For 525  
line standards, EDH data is on lines 9 and 272 and, for 625 line standards, on  
lines 5 and 318. If your source can not insert EDH, use an alternative source,  
such as the Tektronix TSG-422 Option 1S Generator. This substitution is  
effective because sources must generate standard waveforms.  
Connect the waveform monitor to the regenerated serial output of the destination  
receiver as depicted in Figure 3–35.  
Waveform Monitor  
Serial source  
(rear panel)  
(with EDH)  
Serial receiver  
75 W terminator  
SER A  
Loop-through input  
Regenerated  
serial output  
Output  
Figure 3–35: Connection for point-to-point error measurements  
After making the connections, ensure that the serial source is supplying an EDH  
compliant signal. Check that the waveform monitor EDH DET indicator is on.  
Activate the SERIAL STATUS screen. In the error table, the number of program  
3–50  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
seconds that contained errors (errored seconds) is indicated. An elapsed time  
indicator gives the total time since the error counter display was last reset. Use  
the elapsed time to calculate statistics such as percentage errored seconds. Press  
the RESET bezel button to set both the errored seconds readouts and the elapsed  
time counter to zero.  
Each ERR SEC readout has a STATUS field just below it. The status can be  
either Valid, Invalid, or Missing. Valid means a transmitted CRC is available to  
check for errors. Invalid means some EDH information is present, but the CRC  
used to check for errors is not available. Missing means that no EDH information  
is present. In this case, the EDH DET indicator is off. To check the error rate, the  
EDH CRC being used – either FF (full field) or AP (active picture) – must be  
Valid. Note that if a CRC becomes Invalid while the error rate is being deter-  
mined, the ERR SEC readout will freeze. Errors are not detected while the CRC  
is Invalid.  
This measurement method is possible because the serial receiver under test  
creates the reclocked serial output after it has equalized the input signal,  
recovered the clock, and latched the data. Any detection errors affecting the  
receiver also appear in the regenerated serial output and are detected by the  
waveform monitor.  
The ability to measure a receiver error rate by monitoring its regenerated output  
is very useful in an operating system. Although many types of video equipment  
do not include EDH error detection, most have regenerated (or reclocked) serial  
outputs. This technique can bring error rate measurement capability to virtually  
any point in a facility. Strategic placement of waveform monitors can help track  
the performance of an operating video system. Similarly, you can use a single  
EDH monitor to proof an entire digital chain by moving it from one regenerated  
output to the next.  
Error Rate Measurement with AP CRC. The waveform monitor calculates CRC  
check-words for the active picture area of each video field. The two CRC values  
are displayed on the SERIAL STATUS screen: one for field 1 (F1) and one for  
field 2 (F2). With a fixed-pattern test signal, these CRCs should have constant  
values. Hence, any change in the CRC indicates an error. By passing a static test  
signal through system equipment, you can look for errors introduced by the  
system equipment.  
Connect the waveform monitor as shown in Figure 3–35. The source does not  
need EDH, but it must be a fixed pattern signal (repeating every two fields).  
Display the SERIAL STATUS screen. Press the RESET key and check that the  
CHANGE SINCE RESET flag reads No. If an error occurs, a CRC value will  
briefly change values then resume the fixed pattern value. Even a very brief  
change sets the CHANGED SINCE RESET flag to Yes. The elapsed time  
counter indicates the length of time since the flag was last reset to No. The flag  
indicates only that one or more errors occurred.  
3–51  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Comparison of the Two Methods. Of the two methods described above, the EDH  
system is the most powerful. First, it works with any video program material,  
since the source-end CRC is calculated on a field-by-field basis. It does not  
matter if the source is a fixed pattern test signal or moving pictures. Thus, EDH  
can monitor error rate while your facility is in service. Second, the error  
information gathered by the waveform monitor is the most comprehensive when  
using EDH, with errored seconds readouts for both the active picture and full  
field. The big disadvantage of EDH is that it requires calculation and insertion of  
the CRC at the source. At present, not many equipment vendors support EDH.  
The AP CRC Value method does not require any special signal insertion at the  
source, and therefore gets around the problem of poor support for the EDH  
system. But its limitation is that it works only with fixed pattern signals, such as  
those from a test signal generator. This precludes its use for monitoring operating  
video systems. Also, the AP CRC Value method only indicates if there were zero  
or more errors.  
Sweep  
The SWEEP buttons set the sweep rate (time/div) for the horizontal scale and  
enable horizontal magnification. Press the LINE/FIELD button repeatedly to step  
through the following sweep modes:  
H
H
H
H
1 Line. One horizontal line is displayed. Use Line Select function to choose  
one line out or a Field or Frame. The horizontal scale is 5 ms/div.  
2 Line. Two consecutive horizontal lines are displayed. The horizontal scale  
is 10 ms/div.  
1 Field. All lines for one video field are displayed. No horizontal scaling is  
given.  
2 Field. All lines for two video fields are displayed. No horizontal scaling is  
given.  
Use the LIN SEL MENU to choose the line or lines to display.  
The MAG button provides a magnified view of the horizontal scale. In the  
magnified mode, the waveform extends off both sides of the CRT. Use the  
HORIZ POS bezel knob to pan left and right on the waveform. Timing Cursors  
operate correctly in the magnified mode, though one or both may be off screen  
during measurement.  
3–52  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Vector Display Modes  
The waveform monitor provides two types of vector displays. One is a conven-  
tional Vector display that plots the two color difference signals, Pb and Pr,  
against each other. The Vector display is useful for checking the chrominance  
phase and amplitude. The second vector display is the Lightning display. The  
Lightning display plots luminance (Y) versus Pb on the top and Y versus Pr on  
the bottom. This display is useful for evaluating component signal amplitude and  
timing.  
Press the VECTOR/GAMUT button to select a Vector display. Press the lower  
bezel button to select VECTOR or LIGHTNING modes.  
Both vector modes can operate with 75% or 100% Color Bar signals. Press the  
CONFIG MENU button and select the WFM/VEC menu to select the 75% or  
100% graticule to match your test signal.  
Vector Display  
The Vector display plots the two color difference signals, Pb and Pr, against each  
other, similar to a composite vectorscope. Figure 3–36 shows how the color  
difference signals are plotted to create the Vector display. Figure 3–37 shows the  
actual polar graticule with trace lines indicating how a trace would appear on the  
graticule.  
The polar display permits measurements of hue in terms of the relative phase of  
the chrominance signal. Amplitude of chrominance is the displacement from  
center (radial dimension of amplitude) towards the color point.  
R
M
G
Y
L
Pr signal  
B
G
C
Y
Pb signal  
Figure 3–36: Vector display relationship of the Pr and Pb signals  
3–53  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Vector Graticule. The waveform monitor Vector graticule, shown in Figure 3–37,  
operates as a component vectorscope. Each chrominance vector of a Color Bar  
signal terminates as a bright dot in a target. The distance from the center box to  
the target box corresponds to the amplitude for the color being measured. The dot  
brightness corresponds to the duration of the color bar. The dimension of each  
target box represents 2% (±14 mV) of a 700 mV amplitude. The dashed–vector  
line labeled I indicates the saturation or amplitude of flesh tones. The displayed  
amplitude allows comparison to the Color Bar targets.  
@ 525/2:1  
10mS/DIV  
R
M
G
I
Y
L
B
G
C
Y
Figure 3–37: Vector display graticule  
Phase and Amplitude Measurements. With the Vector display, you can check the  
encoder accuracy for both phase and amplitude errors. When taking measure-  
ments make certain your source signal amplitude matches the Vector graticule.  
For example, if the source is a 75% Color Bar signal, then choose the 75%  
graticule in the WFM/VEC Configuration menu. The current graticule selection  
appears beside the graticule.  
Composite signals include a sample of the subcarrier (burst) with each line of  
video to synchronize the decoding of color information. The Vector display is  
based on the accuracy of the color burst sample. Any magnitude or phase  
variance in the color bar vectors is measured by the distance of the vector dots  
from the appropriate targets.  
3–54  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Vector Timing Measurements. In the composite domain, the transitions between  
the vector end points display timing differences. But, because these timing  
differences include the delay in the decoder output filtering, you can usually  
ignore them. In the component domain there is no decoding required and  
therefore the color bar transitions contain useful timing information. These  
timing differences appear as looping or bowing of the transitions. It is possible to  
measure the amount of bowing and convert the results to a coarse delay value. If  
the transition looping appears large, use the Lightning display to measure the  
interchannel delay.  
Lightning Display  
The Lightning display plots the color difference signals, Pb and Pr, against the  
luminance (Y) signal. In the top half of the Lightning display, Pb is plotted  
against Y, and on the bottom half, Pr is plotted against inverted Y. The vertical  
center is the 0 V or black-clamp point. Figure 3–38 shows how the waveform  
monitor plots the Lightning display from the three component signals.  
P (B-Y)  
B
White  
Black  
White  
+ Luminance (Y)  
Y
L
CY  
G
M
R
Y signal  
B
R
Clamp point  
0V  
B
G
M
CY  
Y
L
– Luminance (Y)  
P (R-Y) signal  
r
Figure 3–38: Construction of the Lightning display  
3–55  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Figure 3–39 shows the Lightning graticule with a trace. The target boxes at the  
end of each vector indicate a tolerance of ±14 mV. The closely spaced small dots  
provide a guide for checking transitions. These dots are spaced 40 ns apart while  
the widely spaced dots represent 80 ns. The electronic graticule eliminates the  
effects of CRT nonlinearity.  
40 ns  
@ 525/2:1  
Y
L
C
G
M
R
B
B
R
M
G
C
VECTOR  
LIGHTNING  
Y
L
80 ns  
Figure 3–39: Lightning graticule showing interchannel timing errors  
The three signals are back-porch clamped and identically low-pass filtered to  
provide a common point and identical delay through the system. The color  
difference signals are line alternated, and the luminance signal is inverted on  
alternate lines.  
The information available from the Lightning display is color difference signal  
accuracy (horizontal displacement of either half of the display), luminance gain  
(vertical displacement between the black and white levels), timing delay between  
either color difference signal and luminance (bending of the green/magenta  
transitions). Figure 3–39 shows the graticule and the measurement targets and  
timing delay scales.  
3–56  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Luminance Gain Measurement. The signal is driven along the vertical axis above  
and below the center box by the luminance signal. The lower half is driven down  
from the center. The luminance gain is correct when the center dot (clamped  
black level) is centered in the target box and the positive and negative excursions  
end at the top and bottom of the graticule. Perfect monochrome signals appear as  
a thin vertical line. Any deviation or bending off the center line indicates a color  
variation from the monochrome setup of the display monitor. Luminance gain  
alone can be measured more accurately in either the Waveform or Parade display  
modes.  
Interchannel Timing Measurement. The scale (sequence of dots) between the green  
and magenta targets provides a way to check interchannel timing (CH-2 to CH-1  
and CH-3 to CH-1) or signal delay. If the color difference signal is not coincident  
with luminance, the transitions between color dots will bend. The amount of this  
bending represents the relative signal delay between luminance and the color  
difference signal. The upper half of the display measures the Pb-to-Y timing,  
while the bottom half measures the Pr-to-Y Timing. If the transition bends in  
toward the vertical center or black region, the color difference signal is delayed  
with respect to luminance. If the transition bends out toward white, the color  
difference signal is leading the luminance signal.  
Pr and Pb Gain Measurement. The horizontal deflection of the top half of the  
display is an indication of the Pb gain and the lower half indicates the Pr gain. If  
the color bar signal dots are within the horizontal dimensions of the appropriate  
graticule targets, the Pb and Pr gains are within 2% of the correct amplitude.  
Since the vertical and horizontal dimensions of the graticule target boxes indicate  
2% luminance and color difference gain errors, respectively, you can evaluate  
each color bar for encoding accuracy with these limits. The Lightning display  
shows the relative level or coding accuracy for Y, Pb, and Pr for each of the eight  
primary colors much better than the Parade display mode.  
3–57  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Video In  
The VIDEO IN selections enable Serial input A or B and determine which  
component signals are displayed. The SERIAL A and B button corresponds to  
the SER A and B loop-through inputs on the rear panel. Only one input can be  
active at a time.  
The CH 1 button displays the Y or luminance signal. The CH 2 button displays  
the Pb or B-Y chrominance signal. The CH 3 button displays the Pr or R-Y  
chrominance signal. In the WFM AS RGB mode, CH 1 displays R, CH 2  
displays G, and CH 3 displays B.  
Waveform Display  
The Waveform display mode displays voltage versus time for the selected video  
input (A or B). You can display the three input video channels singly or in  
combination. When you display more than one channel of the input signal, the  
channel traces are overlaid.  
The waveform monitor uses a line-store memory in 1H and Sample Line Select  
modes which allow it to display all video channels from the same video line. This  
feature lets you view and measure concurrent data for all three channels.  
Line Select  
The Line Select menu offers two or three modes depending on your model:  
H
1H. Shows one line of a field or frame. A horizontal line on the output  
monitor signal marks the selected line.  
H
H
15H. Displays 15 successive lines.  
Sample (WFM 601M only). Picks a particular sample in a horizontal line and  
indicates it with a visible marker on the line.  
Cursors  
Gain  
Cursors are available to measure time and amplitude differences.  
Horizontal and vertical magnification are available by pressing the MAG and  
GAIN buttons. Magnification is also valid during cursor measurements.  
3–58  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A: Specifications  
Table A–1 lists the Electrical specifications for the WFM 601A, WFM 601E, and  
WFM 601M Serial Digital Component Waveform Monitors. Performance  
Requirements are generally quantitative and can be tested by the Performance  
Verification Procedure in the Service Manual. Reference information describes  
useful operating parameters that have typical values. These parameters are not  
directly checked in the Performance Verification Procedure. Table A–8 lists the  
EMC compliance specifications.  
The Performance Requirements listed in the electrical specification portion of  
these specifications apply over an ambient temperature range of 0° C to +40° C.  
The rated accuracies are valid when the instrument is calibrated at an ambient  
temperature range of +20° C to +30° C, after a warm-up time of 20 minutes.  
Table A–1: Electrical specifications  
Characteristic  
Performance requirement  
Reference information  
Waveform Vertical Deflection  
Deflection Factor  
For digital input: 700 mV digital  
input = 700 mV $2% screen  
display, any magnifier setting.  
RGB on-screen accuracy $3%.  
Variable Gain Range  
Frequency Response  
0.2X to 1.4X.  
Luminance channel (Y), to  
5.0 MHz $2%;  
Typically $1% to 5.75 MHz luminance (Y)  
channel, and $1% to 2.75 MHz for the color  
Color difference channels (P and difference (P and P ) channels.  
B
B
R
P ) to 2.5 MHz $2%  
R
Transient Response  
Preshoot v1%.  
Overshoot v1%.  
Ringing v1%.  
Pulse-to-bar ratio 0.99:1 to 1.01:1  
Field Rate Tilt  
v1%.  
Line Rate Tilt  
v1%.  
Offscreen Recovery  
1% variation in baseline of a 5 MHz modulated  
pulse when positioned anywhere on screen.  
X1, X5, or X10 with any variable gain setting.  
Voltage Cursor Accuracy  
$0.5% over 20–30° C, $1% over  
rated temperature range.  
Differentiated Step Filter  
Low Pass Filter  
Gain  
Amplitude of pulses v1% variation.  
1 $ 1%.  
Response  
v 3 dB attenuation at 1 MHz, w 40 dB attenua-  
tion at 4 MHz.  
A–1  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A: Specifications  
Table A–1: Electrical specifications (cont.)  
Characteristic  
Performance requirement  
Reference information  
Serial Digital Video Interface  
(SER A and SER B inputs)  
Format  
270 Mbit/s component. Complies with SMPTE  
259M and CCIR 656.  
Input Type  
Input Level  
Passive loop-through, 75 W compensated.  
800 mV peak-to-peak $10%. Input voltages  
outside this range might cause reduced receiver  
performance.  
Return Loss  
Power on  
w25 dB 1–270 MHz, channels on or off.  
w15 dB 1–270 MHz.  
v1%.  
Power off  
Insertion Loss  
Transmission Bandwidth  
50 kHz – 300 MHz $1.0 dB.  
–3 dB at not less than 500 MHz.  
Loop-through Input Isolation  
w50 dB to 300 MHz.  
Serial Receiver Equalization Range  
Proper operation with 19 dB loss at  
135 MHz using coaxial cable  
having 1/F loss characteristics.  
800 mV launch amplitude and 200  
meters (655 feet) of Belden 8281  
coaxial cable.  
Serial Video Output (follows SER A/B  
channel selection)  
Format  
270 Mbit/s component; complies with SMPTE 259M  
and CCIR 656.  
Output Level  
Return Loss  
800 mV p-p $10% into 75 W load Internal adjustment can change output to less than  
600 mV and greater than 1000 mV.  
w15 dB 1–270 MHz  
Eye Pattern Display  
(WFM 601E and WFM 601M Only)  
Type  
Equivalent time sampler  
Bandwidth  
50 kHz to 450 MHz: –3 dB to  
+1 dB  
Low frequency –3 dB point is 500 Hz.  
Rise Time  
500 ps (20-80%), 775 ps (10-90%)  
< 10%, 800 mV step  
Aberrations  
Time Base Jitter  
< 200 ps peak-to-peak  
A–2  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A: Specifications  
Table A–1: Electrical specifications (cont.)  
Characteristic  
Jitter Attenuation  
10 Hz HPF  
Performance requirement  
Reference information  
< 10% for frequencies > 20 Hz. –3 dB at  
approximately 10 Hz.  
100 Hz HPF  
1 kHz HPF  
< 10% for frequencies > 300 Hz. –3 dB at  
approximately 100 Hz.  
< 10% for frequencies > 3 kHz. –3 dB at  
approximately 1 kHz.  
Up to 3 dB jitter gain from 2–4 kHz.  
Display Modes  
Overlay  
Overlays bits 0-9 of a serial word to form each Eye  
opening.  
10-Eye  
Deflection Factor  
Vertical  
Parades bits 0-9 in a 10-Eye display.  
800 mV $ 5% with an 800 mV p-p  
input  
Horizontal  
Overlay Mode  
10-Eye Mode  
Mag On  
1 ns/div $ 3%  
3 ns/div $ 3%  
500 ps/div $ 3%  
Jitter Display (WFM 601M Only)  
Type  
Demodulated recovered clock.  
Digital Readout  
Accuracy  
0.05 UI $10% of reading.  
Dynamic Range  
Alignment Jitter  
Timing Jitter  
2.4 UI p-p  
9.0 UI p-p  
Resolution  
Alignment Jitter  
Timing Jitter  
0.02 UI  
0.1 UI  
–3 dB Bandwidth  
Alignment Jitter Bandwidth  
selection  
10 Hz to 5 MHz  
1 kHz to 5 MHz  
10 kHz to 5 MHz  
100 kHz to 5 MHz  
Timing JItter  
Jitter Waveform  
Accuracy  
10 Hz to 5 MHz  
$ 10%  
A–3  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A: Specifications  
Table A–1: Electrical specifications (cont.)  
Characteristic  
Dynamic Range  
Deflection Factor  
Horizontal  
Performance requirement  
Reference information  
10 UI p-p  
Four modes available:  
1 Line, 2 Line  
1 Field, 2 Field  
Vertical  
X1  
X5  
1 UI/div $5%  
0.2 UI/div $10%  
0.1 UI/div $20%  
X10  
–3 dB Bandwidths  
Bandwidth Selection  
10 Hz to 5 MHz  
1 kHz to 5 MHz  
10 kHz to 5 MHz  
100 kHz to 5 MHz  
Jitter Output (WFM 601M Only)  
120 mV/UI $10% into 75 W load.  
Signal Level & Cable Length Detector  
(WFM 601E and WFM 601M Only)  
Cable Length  
Accuracy  
10 meters $10% of reading (Belden 8281 cable).  
5 meters  
Resolution  
Dynamic Range  
Source Signal Level  
Accuracy  
0 to 400 meters (Belden 8281 cable)  
$0.5 dB for cable lengths from 0–100 meters  
(Belden 8281)  
Resolution  
Dynamic Range  
Cable Types  
0.25 dB  
$3 dB  
Supported cable types:  
Belden 8281  
Belden 1694A  
Belden 1505A  
Video Error Detection  
Type  
Active picture and full field with field rate resolution.  
Uses EDH (Error Detection and Handling) system  
based on CRC check-word. Complies with SMPTE  
RP165.  
Reporting Means  
Error Statistics  
Front-panel ALARM indicator, rear-panel TTL line,  
and CRT readout.  
Asynchronous errored seconds. Active picture and  
full field statistics are separately compiled.  
A–4  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A: Specifications  
Table A–1: Electrical specifications (cont.)  
Characteristic  
Diagnostics  
Performance requirement  
Reference information  
Embedded Audio  
Identifies the presence of up to 16 channels of  
AES/EBU digital audio.  
Ancillary Data  
Bit Activity  
Identifies the presence of ancillary data (other than  
audio and EDH) and indicates if a checksum error  
has occurred.  
Indicates if any of the 10 data bits are always high  
or low during the active picture for an entire field.  
Line Rate  
Indicates whether the signal is 525 or 625 line.  
Format Errors  
Warns that a serial signal format error has occurred  
for the following error types:  
H
H
H
H
H
H
SAV placed incorrectly relative to EAV.  
Line length error.  
Field length error.  
Reserved values used improperly.  
ANC data checksum error.  
ANC data parity error.  
Signal Lost  
Reports absence of the serial video signal.  
Digital Data Value Cursor and Listing  
(WFM 601M Only)  
Digital Waveform  
Non-interpolated waveform display. Cursor  
identifies selected sample value (hexidecimal,  
decimal, binary). Cross-hair cursor inserted on  
picture monitor output shows selected line and  
sample. Vertical and horizontal shift of picture  
monitor output when selecting blanking interval line  
and sample values.  
Data Mode  
Video Mode  
Digital List  
Displays interleaved data stream sequentially with  
31 samples per screen width. Cursor identifies  
selected sample value.  
Displays Y, Cb, Cr data streams separately.  
Channels are selected with VIDEO IN buttons.  
Cursor identifies the selected sample value.  
Sequential list of sample values in table format.  
Cursor identifies selected sample. VIDEO mode  
identifies samples as Y, Cb, Cr.  
External Reference  
Input  
Analog composite video or black burst.  
–1.8 V to +2.2 V, DC plus peak AC  
–8.5 V to +8.5 V, DC plus peak AC  
w 20 kW  
Maximum Operating Input Voltage  
Absolute Maximum Input Voltage  
DC Input Impedance  
A–5  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A: Specifications  
Table A–1: Electrical specifications (cont.)  
Characteristic  
Performance requirement  
Reference information  
Return Loss  
w40 dB to 6 MHz; typically w46 dB to 6 MHz,  
w40 dB to 10 MHz.  
Waveform Horizontal Deflection  
Sweep  
Internal Synchronization: Proper  
horizontal and vertical synchroniza- Sweep free runs without input  
Sweep Length: [12 divisions  
tion with a component digital signal  
conforming to CCIR Rec. 601/656  
and SMPTE 125M.  
External Synchronization: Proper  
horizontal and vertical synchroniza-  
tion with a composite sync signal of  
approximate line and field rate.  
Sweep Timing Accuracy  
1 Line:  
2 Line:  
5 ms/division $1%  
10 ms/division $1%  
1 Field displays one full field, including field rate  
sync. 2 Field displays two full fields and the field  
rate sync between them.  
Sweep Linearity  
$1%  
Magnified Sweep Accuracy  
1 Line: 0.2 ms/division $1%  
2 Line: 1.0 ms/division $1%  
Magnified Sweep Linearity  
Timing Cursors  
$1%  
Accuracy: $1%  
$0.5% over 20–30° C  
Horizontal Position Range  
Any portion of the synchronized  
sweep can be positioned on screen  
in all sweep modes  
Analog Audio Mode (WFM 601A Only)  
Input  
DC coupled, differential input, 20 kinput  
impedance.  
Full Scale Selection  
Full Scale Accuracy  
Bandwidth  
0, 4, 8, and 12 dBu full scale, menu selectable  
$0.5 dB at 1 kHz  
–3 dB w 500 kHz using a leveled  
sine wave.  
X and Y Input Phase Matching  
Maximum Input Voltage  
Calibrator  
v 1_, 20 Hz–20 kHz  
±8 V peak, measured to chassis ground  
Waveform Square Wave  
Amplitude: 700 mV $1%  
Frequency: 100 kHz $0.1%  
Crystal-controlled 10 ms square wave  
Component Vector Mode  
Vertical Bandwidth  
w1.0 MHz  
Horizontal to Vertical Bandwidth  
Matching  
v2° at 500 kHz and 2 MHz  
Vertical Gain Accuracy  
$1%  
A–6  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A: Specifications  
Table A–1: Electrical specifications (cont.)  
Characteristic  
Performance requirement  
Reference information  
Horizontal Gain Accuracy  
$1%  
Display to Graticule Registration  
v0.25 box with the color bar  
black, display dot centered in target  
Electronic Graticule Shape  
Vector Display  
Minimal visible gaps or tails at corners of target  
boxes  
P is displayed on horizontal axis and P is  
B
R
displayed on vertical axis.  
Lightning and Diamond Mode  
Vertical Gain Accuracy  
Electronic Graticule Display  
Diamond  
$2%  
GBR Deflection axis indicated.  
Y is displayed vertically.  
Lightning  
P is displayed horizontally on top half of display.  
B
P is displayed horizontally on bottom half of  
R
display.  
RGB Gamut Error Indication  
Detection Level  
Positive detection level = 735 mV  
"7 mV (nominally 105% of legal  
RGB).  
Negative Detection level = –35 mV  
"7 mV.  
Arrowhead Mode (NTSC/PAL Composite  
Limit Display Mode)  
Signal to Graticule Registration  
Color bar black is positioned in the center of 7.5  
IRE box within v.25 box width.  
Signal to Graticule Accuracy  
(PAL values in parenthesis)  
"2 IRE, 100 IRE and 131 IRE  
("2, 700 mV)  
Composite Limit Cursor Accuracy  
(PAL values in parenthesis)  
"2% at 100, 110, 120, 131 IRE (700 and 950 mV)  
Composite Limit Detection Level  
Accuracy (PAL values in parenthesis)  
Detection level = 102% "3% of  
cursor level  
Detection level can be set to 100, 110, 120, or 131  
IRE (700 or 950 mV PAL)  
Bowtie Mode  
Common Mode Rejection Ratio  
Accuracy  
w34 dB at 2.5 MHz  
$3%  
Interchannel Timing Match  
Picture Monitor Outputs  
Signal Format  
$2.0 ns  
EBU/N10 or RGB, menu selectable.  
A–7  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A: Specifications  
Table A–1: Electrical specifications (cont.)  
Characteristic  
Performance requirement  
Reference information  
Active Video Accuracy  
WFM 601M  
700 mV $1% peak-to-peak  
(Y-P -P mode)  
Typically < "2% for RGB mode.  
B
R
WFM 601E and WFM 601A  
Typically 700 mV $1% peak-to-  
peak (Y-P -P mode)  
B
R
Black (Blanking) Output Level  
Frequency Response  
0 mV "35 mV  
Y to 5.75 MHz: $1%  
P and P to 2.75 MHz: $1%  
B
R
Non-Linearity  
v0.5%  
Group Delay Error  
Y at 5.75 MHz: v10 ns  
P and P at 2.75 MHz: v20 ns  
B
R
Interchannel Timing Match  
Sync Amplitude Accuracy  
Y-to-P and Y-to-P "5.0 ns  
B
R
300 mV $10%  
Analog sync is inserted on Y channel only (G  
channel only in RGB mode).  
Sync to Video Timing  
Return Loss  
525 line rate: 9.037 ms "0.050 ms  
625 line rate: 9.777 ms "0.050 ms  
50 kHz to 5 MHz: w40 dB  
Table A–2: CRT display  
Characteristic  
Performance requirement  
Reference information  
CRT Viewing Area  
80   100 mm  
Horizontal: 12.5 divisions  
Vertical: 1.19 V  
Accelerating Potential  
Trace Rotation Range  
Graticule  
Nominally 13.75 kV  
>$1° from horizontal  
Total adjustment range is typically w8°.  
Internal with variable illumination  
A–8  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A: Specifications  
Table A–3: AC power source  
Characteristic  
Description  
Reference information  
Electrical Rating  
90 – 250 V, 50/60 Hz, 1.5 A maximum ;  
Continuous range from 90 to 250 VAC  
Supply Type  
Single Phase  
Supply Connection  
Power Consumption  
Detachable cord set  
< 115 VA (75 watts)  
Table A–4: Environmental characteristics  
Characteristic  
Standard  
Reference information  
Vibration  
Military Specification: Mil–T–28800D,  
Paragraph 1.2.2, Class 3  
5 minutes at 5 – 15 Hz with 0.060 inch  
displacement  
5 minutes at 15 – 25 Hz with 0.040 inch  
displacement  
5 minutes at 25 – 55 Hz with 0.020 inch  
displacement  
Mechanical Shock  
Transportation  
Humidity  
Non-operating: 50 g 1/2 sine, 11 ms  
duration, 3 shocks per surface (18 total)  
Qualified under NSTA Test Procedure  
1A, Category II  
24 inch drop  
Proper operation at 95% +0, –5%  
Relative Humidity  
Do not operate with visible moisture on the  
circuit boards.  
Table A–5: Physical characteristics  
Characteristic  
Standard  
Dimensions  
Height:  
Width:  
Depth:  
133.4 mm (5.25 in)  
215.9 mm (8.5 in)  
460.4 mm (18.125 in)  
Weight  
Net:  
3.8 kg (8 lbs)  
Shipping: 7.2 kg (15.7 lbs) approximate  
A–9  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A: Specifications  
Table A–6: Safety standards  
Characteristic  
Standard  
U.S. Nationally Recognized Testing  
Laboratory Listing  
ANSI/ISA S82.01 - Safety Standard for Electrical and Electronic Test, Measuring,  
Controlling, and Related Equipment, 1994.  
Canadian Certification  
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 1010.1 - Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for  
Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Use.  
European Union Compliance  
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, Amended by 93/68/EEC  
IEC1010-1 - Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control, and  
Laboratory Use.  
Additional Compliance  
UL3111-1 - Standard for Electrical Measuring and Test Equipment  
IEC1010-1 - Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control, and  
Laboratory Use.  
Table A–7: Safety certification compliance  
Characteristic  
Standard  
Temperature (operating)  
Altitude (operating)  
Equipment Type  
0° to +40° C  
2000 meters  
Test and Measuring  
Equipment Class  
Class I: Grounded product (as defined in IEC 1010-1, Annex H)  
Overvoltage Category  
Overvoltage Category II (as defined in IEC 1010-1, Annex J).  
Note: Rated for indoor use only.  
Category Examples of Products in this Category:  
CAT III  
Distribution-level mains, fixed installation  
CAT II  
CAT I  
Local-level mains, appliances, portable equipment  
Signal levels in special equipment or parts of equipment, telecommunications,  
electronics  
Pollution Degree  
Pollution Degree 2: Do not operate in environments where conductive pollutants may be  
present.  
A–10  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A: Specifications  
Table A–8: Certifications and compliances  
Characteristic  
Standard  
EC Declaration of Conformity  
Meets intent of Directive 89/336/EEC for Electromagnetic Compatibility and Low Voltage  
Directive 73/23/ECC for Product Safety. Compliance was demonstrated to the following  
specifications as listed in the Official Journal of the European Communities:  
1,2  
EMC Directive 89/336/EEC  
EN 55011  
:
Class A Radiated and Conducted Emissions  
EN 50081-1 Emissions:  
EN 60555-2  
EN 50082-1 Immunity:  
IEC 801-2  
AC Power Line Harmonic Emissions  
Electrostatic Discharge Immunity  
RF Electromagnetic Field Immunity  
Electrical Fast Transient/Burst Immunity  
Power Line Surge Immunity  
IEC 801-3  
IEC 801-4  
IEC 801-5  
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC:  
EN 61010-1  
Safety requirements for electrical equipment for  
measurement, control, and laboratory use  
1
Use high-quality shielded cables.  
2
When installed in any of the following Tektronix instrument enclosures:  
1700F00 (Tektronix part number 437–0100–04)  
1700F02 (Tektronix part number 437–0018–07)  
1700F05 (Tektronix part number 437–0095–04)  
A–11  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A: Specifications  
A–12  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B: Remote Operation  
The waveform monitor has two multi-pin connectors on the rear panel that  
provide different types of remote control. The RS-232 port provides for  
automated calibration using a procedure contained in the Service Manual. In a  
future firmware release, the RS-232 port will provide remote control using a  
SCPI command set. The REMOTE connector provides a way to monitor signal  
errors and to load or save Presets. It also provides two audio channel inputs for  
the WFM 601A.  
RS–232 Connector  
The RS-232 connector is a 9-pin D-type connector that provides a remote  
verification interface. Figure B–1 shows the pin assignments and the commu-  
nication parameters for the RS-232 interface.  
Pin  
Number Data Connection  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DCD (Received line signal detector)  
RXD (Received data)  
TXD (Transmitted data)  
DTR (DTE readly)  
Signal ground  
Communication parameters  
Baud: 9600  
DCR (DCE readly)  
RTS (Request to send)  
CTS (Clear to send)  
Not connected  
Data bits: 8  
Stop bits: 1  
Parity: None  
Flow control: Xon/Xoff  
Figure B–1: Pin assignments for the RS-232 connector  
Remote Connector  
The rear-panel REMOTE connector is a 25-pin, D-type connector that allows  
low-level remote control and audio channel inputs. Use the RS-232 interface for  
control using SCPI commands sent from a PC controller.  
Preset Control  
The Remote connector provides control of Presets and monitoring of line select  
and video alarm events. Eight of the Presets (stored front-panel settings) can be  
stored or recalled remotely.  
B–1  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B: Remote Operation  
When STORE (pin 25) is grounded along with one of the preset pins, the current  
front-panel settings are stored at the selected Preset location.  
Line Select Strobe  
Pin 15 outputs an active-low TTL pulse during selected lines when in Line  
Select modes. Use this signal as a trigger for a logic analyzer or oscilloscope.  
Serial Video and Gamut  
Alarm  
Pin 16 outputs an active-low TTL level whenever the front-panel ALARM light  
is illuminated or when a gamut alarm occurs. You must enable the gamut alarms  
using the Configure menu. See pages for 3–10 and 3–11 for more information on  
enabling the Gamut and Serial alarms.  
Remote Connector Pin  
Assignments  
Pin assignments for the REMOTE connector are shown in Figure B–2 and  
described in Table B–1. You enable functions by ground closures (TTL lows) on  
specified pins. Functions with “overbars” indicate an active low state.  
Figure B–2: Pin assignments for the REMOTE connector  
Table B–1: Remote connector pin assignments and functions  
Pin  
number  
Function  
Signal requirement  
Miscellaneous information  
1
Not Used  
No connection allowed  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Ground  
TTL ground  
Not Used  
Not Used  
Ground  
No connection allowed  
No connection allowed  
TTL ground  
Not Used  
Ground  
No connection allowed  
TTL ground  
+Y Audio Input  
Audio input, +8 V peak  
(WFM 601A Only) The +Y and –Y inputs can  
function as differential inputs for a common signal.  
9
–Y Audio Input  
+X Audio Input  
Audio input, –8 V peak  
Audio input, +8 V peak  
(WFM 601A Only)  
10  
(WFM 601A Only) The +X and –X inputs can  
function as differential inputs for a common signal.  
B–2  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B: Remote Operation  
Table B–1: Remote connector pin assignments and functions (cont.)  
Pin  
number  
Function  
Signal requirement  
Miscellaneous information  
11  
–X Audio Input  
Audio input, –8 V peak  
(WFM 601A Only)  
12  
13  
14  
15  
Not Used  
Not Used  
Ground  
No connection allowed  
No connection allowed  
TTL ground  
Line Strobe  
In Line Select Modes,  
true, low, during selected video  
lines  
16  
17  
Serial Video Alarm  
Preset 1  
True low. Low pulse when a  
serial error or a gamut alarm  
occurs  
You must enable the gamut alarm (page 3–10)  
and serial alarm (page 3–11 ) in the Configure  
menu.  
Ground (TTL low)  
Ground (TTL low)  
Ground (TTL low)  
Ground (TTL low)  
Ground (TTL low)  
Ground (TTL low)  
Ground (TTL low)  
Recalls the stored Preset from this location, or  
selects the Preset 1 memory location to store the  
current front-panel settings. See the pin 25  
description.  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
Preset 2  
Preset 3  
Preset 4  
Preset 5  
Preset 6  
Preset 7  
Recalls the stored Preset from this location, or  
selects the Preset 1 memory location to store the  
current front-panel settings. See the pin 25  
description.  
Recalls the stored Preset from this location, or  
selects the Preset 1 memory location to store the  
current front-panel settings. See the pin 25  
description.  
Recalls the stored Preset from this location, or  
selects the Preset 1 memory location to store the  
current front-panel settings. See the pin 25  
description.  
Recalls the stored Preset from this location, or  
selects the Preset 1 memory location to store the  
current front-panel settings. See the pin 25  
description.  
Recalls the stored Preset from this location, or  
selects the Preset 1 memory location to store the  
current front-panel settings. See the pin 25  
description.  
Recalls the stored Preset from this location, or  
selects the Preset 1 memory location to store the  
current front-panel settings. See the pin 25  
description.  
B–3  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B: Remote Operation  
Table B–1: Remote connector pin assignments and functions (cont.)  
Pin  
number  
Function  
Signal requirement  
Miscellaneous information  
24  
Preset 8  
Ground (TTL low)  
Recalls the stored Preset from this location, or  
selects the Preset 1 memory location to store the  
current front-panel settings. See the pin 25  
description.  
25  
Store  
Ground (TTL low)  
Grounding STORE enables storage of instrument  
settings. When STORE transitions low when one of  
the PRESETs is low, the current front-panel  
settings are stored in that Preset location.  
B–4  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C: Remote Command Set  
This section describes the remote command set for the waveform monitor and  
provides examples of typical usage. The remote command set is a versatile and  
convenient interface that conforms to industry standards for programmable  
instruments.  
The waveform monitor permits remote operation through the RS-232 port on the  
rear panel. Remote communication parameters are described in Appendix B:  
Remote Operation.  
The waveform monitor was not designed to be machine-driven; consequently,  
characters can be dropped if they are input while the processor is carrying out  
other operations. To compensate, the code for a remote communications retry  
program has been included at the end of this section. This program ensures that  
characters are not dropped when they are input into the waveform monitor. You  
may type commands from your work station with or without the program;  
however, if you want to create machine-driven test and measurement protocols,  
use the retry program provided.  
The symbols used in the descriptions of the remote commands are shown in  
Table C–1.  
Table C–1: Symbols used in this section  
Symbol  
<ą>  
[ ]  
Meaning  
Group; one element is required  
Group; elements are optional  
OR; separates a list of arguments  
|
The commands in this section are arranged alphabetically by groups of similar  
commands. Commands with similar syntax are explained in tables with  
argument options and comments about each command. Examples of possible  
command strings and responses are then listed below the tables. The rest of the  
commands are described individually with examples of syntax and typical usage  
given for each command.  
In the following descriptions, the capitalized letters in the Syntax descriptions are  
the minimum letters necessary for the waveform monitor to recognize the  
command. Commands and arguments are not case sensitive.  
Most commands have a query form. Generally, you can query at any point along  
a command string back to the root but you can not query arguments. In the  
following command descriptions, queries are given below the command syntax  
C–1  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C: Remote Command Set  
in the Syntax sections. Query examples and typical responses are given in the  
Response sections.  
C–2  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cable Measurement Commands  
Cable Measurement Commands  
The commands in this section provide control of the cable measurements  
available in the Serial status mode. You access these measurements differently  
depending on whether your waveform monitor has V1.X or V2.X (or latter)  
firmware. With either version, you must first enter the Serial mode by sending  
the command MENU:SERial. This is equivalent to pressing the SERIAL button  
on the front panel.  
For waveform monitors with version V1.X firmware, cable and signal strength  
commands are active after sending the command SERIAL:MENU STATUS. For  
version V2.X firmware, send the command SERIAL:MENU CABLE. This is  
equivalent to pressing the side bezel button to select the CABLE menu. Cable  
measurements are active only when the SERIAL STATUS menu (V1.X) or  
SERIAL CABLE menu (V2.X) are selected.  
Use the SLM: commands to select the type of cable your installation uses and to  
query the waveform monitor for cable type and length. You can also query for  
the computed signal level of a monitored signal. Not all commands work with all  
versions of firmware.  
SLM:CABle <B8281 | B1694 | B1505> (WFM 601E and WFM 601M Only)  
Selects the cable type for use by the Signal Level and Approx Cable Length  
measurements. This selection corresponds to the Cable Type selection in the  
SERIAL menu. This command works with V1.X and V2.X firmware.  
Syntax  
SLM:CABle <B8281 | B1694 | B1505>  
SLM[:CABle]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<B8281 | B1694 | B1505>  
slm:cab b1694  
slm?  
:SLM:LEVEL 4.75 dB;LENGTH 20 Meters;CABLE  
B1694; SOURCE 95 PERCENT  
slm:cab?  
:SLM:CABLE B1694  
C–3  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cable Measurement Commands  
SLM:SOURCE? (WFM 601E and WFM 601M Only)  
Returns the power (Signal Level readout) of the source as a percent of an  
800 mV signal. This command works only with V2.X firmware. See the  
corresponding V1.X firmware command SLM:LEVEL.  
Syntax  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
SLM:[SOURCE]?  
None  
slm:source?  
:SLM:SOURCE 95 PERCENT  
SLM:RCVR? (WFM 601E and WFM 601M Only)  
Returns a dB value for the power lost in the cable. This command works only  
with V2.X firmware. To ensure a correct measurement, use the command  
SLM:CABLE to indicate the cable type you are using.  
Syntax  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
SLM:[RCVR]?  
None  
slm:rcvr?  
:SLM:RCVR 2 dB  
C–4  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cable Measurement Commands  
SLM:LEVEL? (WFM 601E and WFM 601M Only)  
Returns the power (Signal Level readout) of the source in decibels with reference  
to an 800 mV signal. This command works only with V1.X firmware. See the  
corresponding V2.X firmware command SLM:SOURCE.  
The Signal Level value is derived as LEVEL= 20 Log (Estimated Source  
Power)/800 mV. A negative sign indicates that the received power is below  
800 mV.  
Syntax  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
SLM[:LEVEL]?  
None  
slm:level?  
SLM:LEVEL 4.75 dB  
SLM:LENGTH? (WFM 601E and WFM 601M Only)  
Returns the Approx Cable Length measurement, based on the SLM:CAB setting.  
Cable length is the amount of cable between the video source and the waveform  
monitor. This command works for firmware version V1.X and V2.X.  
Syntax  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
SLM[:LENGTH]?  
None  
slm:length?  
SLM:LENGTH 20 METERS  
C–5  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration Commands  
Configuration Commands  
The commands in this section allow you make the following changes to the  
waveform monitor:  
H
H
Select the source of your reference signal  
Select a specific mode for different displays (for example, select the  
Lightning mode when in the Vector display)  
H
Set parameters for various displays  
Most of these commands correspond to the selections available from the  
CONFIG menu on the waveform monitor.  
REFErence: MODE <INT | EXT>  
Selects either the internal serial digital or external composite video for the  
synchronization reference.  
Syntax  
REFErence: MODE <INT | EXT>  
REFErence: MODE?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<INT | EXT>  
refe:mode int  
refe:mode?  
:REFERENCE:MODE INTERNAL  
C–6  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration Commands  
ARROWhead:LIMIT:PAL <MV_700 | MV_950>  
Sets the PAL gamut limit amplitude on the ARROWHEAD graticule. The gamut  
limit triggers an alarm when exceeded by the input signal. This selection  
corresponds to the choices available under GAMUT in the CONFIG GAMUT  
menu.  
Use the command DISPlay:SINGLE:GAMut to enable the GAMUT display.  
Syntax  
ARROWhead:LIMIT: PAL <MV_700 | MV_950>  
ARROWhead[:LIMIT | :LIMIT:PAL]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
<MV_700 | MV_950>  
arrow:limit:PAL mv_950  
arrow:limit:pal MV_700  
Returns  
arrow:limit:pal?  
:ARROWHEAD:LIMIT:PAL MV_700  
ARROWhead:LIMIT:NTSC <IRE_100 | IRE_110 | IRE_120 | IRE_131>  
Sets the NTSC gamut limit on the ARROWHEAD graticule. The gamut limit  
triggers an alarm when exceeded by the input signal. These selections correspond  
to the choices available under GAMUT in the CONFIG GAMUT menu.  
Use the command DISPlay:SINGLE:GAMut to enable the GAMUT display.  
Syntax  
ARROWhead:LIMIT:NTSC <IRE_100 | IRE_110 | IRE_120 | IRE_131>  
ARROWhead[:LIMIT | :LIMIT:NTSC]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
<IRE_100 | IRE_110 | IRE_120 | IRE_131>  
arrow:limit:ntsc ire_120  
arrow:limit:ntsc ire_131  
Returns  
arrow:limit:ntsc?  
:ARROWHEAD:LIMIT:NTSC IRE_131  
C–7  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration Commands  
ARROWhead:FORMat <NTSC | PAL | AUTO>  
Sets the video format for theARROWHEAD graticule.  
Use the command DISPlay:SINGLE:GAMut to enable the GAMUT display. Use  
the command ARROW:LIMIT:NTSC or ARROW:LIMIT:PAL to set the gamut  
alarm setting.  
Syntax  
ARROWhead:FORMat <NTSC | PAL | AUTO>  
ARRPWhead[:FORMat]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<NTSC | PAL | AUTO>  
arrow:form:ntsc  
arrow:form?  
:ARROWHEAD:FORMAT NTSC  
GAMut:GRATicule <ARROWhead | DIAmond>  
Selects either the Arrowhead or Diamond display for displaying the signal  
gamut. The Arrowhead display checks the composite gamut and the Diamond  
display checks the RGB gamut.  
Use the command DISPlay:SINGLE:GAMut to enable the Gamut display mode.  
Syntax  
GAMut:GRATicule <ARROWhead | DIAmond>  
GAMut[:GRATicule]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
<ARROWhead | DIAmond>  
display:single gamut  
gam:grat dia  
Returns  
gam:grat?  
:GAMUT:GRATICULE DIAMOND  
C–8  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration Commands  
GAMut:ALarm:TRIGger <NONE | CMPST | RGB | BOTH>  
Determines the type of gamut error that will trigger a gamut alarm. This  
command corresponds to the selections found under GAMUT CHECK in the  
GAMUT CONFIG menu.  
Syntax  
GAMut:ALarm:TRIGger <NONE | CMPST | RGB | BOTH>  
GAMut[:ALarm | :ALarm:TRIGger]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<NONE | CMPST | RGB | BOTH>  
gam:al:trig both  
gam:al:trig?  
:GAMUT:ALARM:TRIGGER BOTH  
GAMut:ALarm:DISPlay <SCRN | PICT | BOTH>  
Determines where the gamut alarm indicator is displayed. This command  
corresponds to the selections found under ALARM DISP in the GAMUT  
CONFIG menu.  
Syntax  
GAMut:ALarm:DISPlay <SCRN | PICT | BOTH>  
GAMut[:ALarm | :ALarm:DISPlay]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<SCRN | PICT | BOTH>  
gam:al:disp pict  
gam:al:disp?  
:GAMUT:ALARM:DISPLAY PICT  
C–9  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration Commands  
STANDard <LINES_525 | LINES_625 | AUTO>  
Sets the scanning standard that the instrument expects to NTSC (525 lines) or  
PAL (625 lines). When in the AUTO mode, the waveform monitor automatically  
senses the standard of the input signal. This selection corresponds to the choices  
available under STANDARD in the CONFIG FORMAT menu.  
Syntax  
STANDard <LINES_525 | LINES_625 | AUTO>  
STANDard?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<LINES_525 | LINES_625 | AUTO>  
stand auto  
stand?  
STANDARD AUTO  
VECtor:BARS <B100 | B75>  
Selects the 75% or 100% graticule for the Lightning and Vector modes. The  
graticule must match the type of the selected input signal. This selection  
corresponds to the choices available under COLOR BARS in the CONFIG  
WFM/VEC menu.  
Syntax  
VECtor:BARS <B100 | B75>  
VECtor[:BARS]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<B100 | B75>  
vec:bars b75  
vec:bars?  
:VECTOR:BARS B75  
C–10  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration Commands  
VECtor:GRATicule <LTNG | VECtor>  
Selects either the Lightning or Vector display. Use the command  
DISP:SINGLE:VEC (page C–25) to enable the vector display modes.  
Syntax  
VECtor:GRATicule <LTNG | VECtor>  
VECtor[:GRATicule]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<LTNG | VECtor>  
vec:grat ltng  
vec:grat?  
:VECTOR:GRATICULE LIGHTNING  
SERial:MENU <STATUS | FORM | CABLE>  
Sets the Serial Format display to the Status, Format, or Cable screens. The  
STATUS screen includes information such as signal presence, line rate, and error  
rate. The FORMAT screen displays the results of several data format checks. The  
CABLE screen displays the calculated strength of the input signal and the cable  
length.  
The CABLE argument is valid only with firmware V2.X and later. With  
firmware V1.X, the cable and signal strength readouts are available on the  
STATUS screen.  
Syntax  
SERial:MENU <STATUS | FORM | CABLE>  
SERial[:MENU]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
<STATUS | FORM | CABLE>  
menu serial  
serial:menu form  
ser:menu status  
Returns  
ser:menu?  
:SERIAL:MENU STATUS  
C–11  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration Commands  
SERial:DISPlay <RGB | YPbPr>  
Sets the display to native YPbPr or transcoded RGB for the Waveform and  
Parade displays. The monitor outputs are not affected. This selection corresponds  
to the choices available under WFM AS in the CONFIG WFM/VEC menu.  
Syntax  
SERial:DISPlay <RGB | YPbPr>  
SERial[:DISPlay]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
<RGB | YPbPr>  
ser:disp RGB  
SER:DISP ypbpr  
Returns  
ser:disp?  
:SERIAL:DISPLAY YPBPR  
SERial:MONitor <GBR | YPbPr>  
Sets the format of the rear panel MONITOR OUTputs to YPbPr or GBR. This  
selection corresponds to the choices available under MON OUT AS in the  
CONFIG FORMAT menu.  
Syntax  
SERial:MONitor <GBR | YPbPr>  
SERial[:MONitor]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
<GBR | YPbPr>  
ser:mon gbr  
SERIAL:MON YPBPR  
Returns  
ser:mon?  
:SERIAL:MONITOR YPBPR  
C–12  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration Commands  
SERial:EAVSAV <PASS | STRIP>  
This command permits stripping of the END/START of ACTIVE VIDEO  
information from the displayed signal. This selection corresponds to the choices  
available under EAV–SAV in the CONFIG WFM/VEC menu.  
Syntax  
SERial:EAVSAV <PASS | STRIP>  
SERial[:EAVSAV]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
<PASS | STRIP>  
ser:eavsav pass  
serial:eavsav strip  
Returns  
ser:eavsav?  
:SERIAL:EAVSAV STRIP  
SERial:ALarm:<error type> <alarm setting>  
These commands select or disable checking for several types of format errors and  
correspond to the error selections available in the CONFIG SER ALARM menu.  
Table C–2 lists the SERial:ALarm error type commands <error type> and  
options <alarm setting>.  
Use the UIMENU:CONFIGSEL SERIALARM command (page C–14) to put the  
waveform monitor into the serial alarm mode before using this command.  
Syntax  
SERial:ALarm:<error type> <alarm setting>  
SERial[:ALarm | :ALarm:<error type>]?  
Arguments  
:<error type> <alarm setting>  
C–13  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration Commands  
Table C–2: SERial:ALarm: commands and options  
:<error type> <alarm setting> Remarks  
FMTERR  
(Format error)  
ALARM | OFF  
Sets the format error alarm on or off. When on, a Serial  
Format error lights the Alarm LED on the front panel. This  
selection corresponds to the choices available under FMT  
ERROR in the CONFIG SER ALARM menu.  
FFCRC  
ALARM | OFF  
Sets the full-field cyclic redundancy check (FFCRC) error  
alarm on or off. When on, a full-field CRC error lights the  
Alarm LED on the front panel. This selection corresponds  
to the choices available under FULL FIELD CRC ERROR  
in the CONFIG SER ALARM menu.  
(Full-field cyclic  
redundancy  
check)  
APCRC  
ALARM | OFF  
Sets the active picture CRC error alarm on or off. When  
on, an active picture CRC error lights the Alarm LED on  
the front panel. This selection corresponds to the choices  
available under ACTIVE PIC CRC ERROR in the CONFIG  
SER menu.  
(Active picture  
cyclic redun-  
dancy check)  
Examples  
Returns  
ser:alarm:ffcrc off  
ser:alarm:fmterr alarm  
serial:alarm:apcrc alarm  
serial:alarm:apcrc?  
:SERIAL:ALARM:APCRC ALARM  
serial:alarm?  
:SERIAL:ALARM:FMTERR ALARM;FFCRC OFF;APCRC ALARM  
UIMENU:<command> <options>  
These commands provide access to the CONFIG and CRT menus, enable the  
PREset functions, and clear the menu display. Table C–3 lists the UIMENU  
(User Interface menu) commands and argument options.  
Syntax  
UIMENU:<command> <options>  
UIMENU[:<command>]?  
Arguments  
:<command> <options>  
C–14  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration Commands  
Table C–3: UIMENU: commands and options  
:<command>  
<options>  
Remarks  
STICKY  
FILTer | CURsor | LINESe- Sets the selection to the named subsystem  
lect | GAIN | CONFIG  
when in the UIMENU mode. The Sticky  
function is accessible from the front panel  
by pressing a menu button before pressing  
the CONFIG button.  
PREset  
ON | OFF  
Enables or disables UIMENU presets. Use  
the PRESET commands to recall, store,  
and name presets.  
CONFIG  
ON | OFF  
Selects the CONFIG menu for display. Use  
the CONFIGSEL command to select a  
particular display or mode to configure.  
CONFIGFCT  
CONFIGSEL  
ON | OFF  
Turns on or off the USER INTERFACE  
MENU (also accessible from the bezel  
knob).  
WFMVEC | EY | JIT |  
Selects a category in the CONFIG menu.  
SERIALARM | GAM | CAL This selection is equivalent to turning the  
bezel knob in the CONFIG menu. Use the  
CONFIG command to enable the CONFIG  
menu.  
CRTADJUST  
READ | TRACE |DISPLAY Enables the CRT adjustments on the  
current display, if allowed.  
Examples  
Returns  
uimenu:preset off  
uimenu:config on  
uimenu:configsel wfmvec  
uimenu:configfct on  
uimenu?  
:UIMENU:STICKY FILTER;PRESET OFF;CONFIG ON;CONFIGFCT  
ON;CONFIGSEL WFMVEC;CRTADJUST TRACE  
uimenu:preset?  
:UIMENU:PRESET OFF  
C–15  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cursor Commands  
Cursor Commands  
The commands in this section allow you to select and move the voltage and  
timing cursors on the waveform monitor. They also allow you to make measure-  
ments using the cursors.  
CURsor:SELect <VOLT | TIME | VOLT_TIME | MARK | NONE>  
Enables any one of the following cursor types:  
H
H
H
H
VOLT provides two voltage cursors and a track control.  
TIME provides two time cursors and a track control.  
MARK provides three amplitude markers.  
VOLT_TIME provides both VOLT and TIME cursors. Use CUR:CONTROL  
to select either the voltage or time cursors.  
Syntax  
CURsor:SELect <VOLT | TIME | VOLT_TIME | MARK | NONE>  
CURsor[:SELect]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
<VOLT | TIME | VOLT_TIME | MARK | NONE>  
cur:sel volt  
cur:select mark  
cursor:select volt_time  
Returns  
cur?  
:CURSOR:SELECT VOLT_TIME;CONTROL TIME  
cursor:select?  
:CURSOR:SELECT VOLT_TIME  
C–16  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cursor Commands  
CURsor:CONTROL <VOLT | TIME>  
Selects either the VOLT or TIME cursor when the cursor type is both voltage  
and time. This command operates like the bezel button for selecting between  
voltage and time cursors when VOLT_TIME (or the front panel selection V+T)  
is enabled.  
Syntax  
CUR:CONTROL <VOLT | TIME>  
CUR[:CONTROL]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<VOLT | TIME>  
cur:control time  
cursor:control?  
:CURSOR:CONTROL TIME  
MC:<ONE | TWO | THREE> <marker position>  
Sets the position of the three amplitude markers over the voltage range of the  
displayed waveform. These selections correspond to the MARK1, MARK2, and  
MARK3 bezel knobs when MARK is enabled under the CURSOR menu.  
The range of accepted values for the argument <marker position> is 548 to 3548.  
Syntax  
MC:<ONE | TWO | THREE> <marker position>  
MC[:ONE | TWO | THREE]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
:<ONE | TWO | THREE> <marker position>  
mc:three1838  
mc:one 1200  
Returns  
mc?  
:MCURSORS:ONE 1200;TWO 2025;THREE 1838  
C–17  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cursor Commands  
<VC | TC>:<ONE | TWO> <voltage level | timing range>  
Positions the voltage or timing cursors over the voltage range or timing base of  
the displayed waveform. When :TRACK is ON, moving one cursor moves the  
other cursor the same distance. Table C–4 describes the voltage and timing  
cursor positioning commands, arguments, and limits.  
Syntax  
<VC | TC>:<ONE | TWO> <voltage level | timing range>  
<VC | TC>[:ONE | TWO]?  
Arguments  
<voltage level | timing range>  
Table C–4: Voltage and Timing Cursor positioning commands and options  
Commands  
Arguments  
Limits  
VC:<ONE | TWO>  
<voltage level>  
0 – 4000  
TC:<ONE | TWO>  
<timing range>  
0 – 4000  
Examples  
Returns  
vc:one 3000  
tc:two 2136  
tc:one 1000  
tc?  
:TCURSORS:ONE 1000;TWO 2136;DIFFERENCE 1136;TRACK OFF  
C–18  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cursor Commands  
<TC | VC>:TRACK <ON | OFF>  
Enables cursor tracking. When :TRACK is ON, moving one cursor moves the  
other cursor an equal amount in the same direction. Table C–5 describes the  
voltage and timing cursor tracking commands. Both options can be turned ON or  
OFF.  
Use the Voltage and Timing Cursor positioning commands (page C–18) to move  
the cursors.  
Syntax  
<TC | VC>:TRACK <ON | OFF>  
<TC | VC>[:TRACK]?  
Arguments  
<ON | OFF>  
Table C–5: Voltage and Timing Cursor tracking commands and options  
Commands  
Arguments  
Remarks  
VC:TRACK  
<ON | OFF>  
When on, the Voltage cursors move together to maintain  
the distance between them. Moving VC:ONE causes  
VC:TWO to move the same amount.  
TC:TRACK  
<ON | OFF>  
When on, the Timing cursors move together to maintain  
the distance between them. Moving TC:ONE causes  
TC:TWO to move the same amount.  
Examples  
Returns  
vc:track on  
tc:track off  
tc:track?  
:TCURSORS:TRACK OFF  
C–19  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital Waveform and Digital List Commands  
Digital Waveform and Digital List Commands  
The commands in this section allow you to change parameters for the Digital  
Waveform and Digital List displays.  
DGTL? (WFM 601M Only)  
NOTE. The values displayed when using this command are accurate only when  
the waveform monitor is in the Data List mode.  
Returns data for all DGTL display settings. For a description of each part of the  
returned data, refer to the associated command descriptions.  
Syntax  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
DGTL?  
None  
dgtl?  
dgtl?  
:DGTL:VIDMODE VIDEO;FREEZE ON;BASE HEX;REGION  
ACTIVE;DATA:V0 528;V1 528;V2 528;V3 532;V4 532;V5 532;V6  
532;V7_SELECTED 536;V8 536;V9 536;V10 536;V11 540;V12 540;V13  
540;V14 540;:DGTL:VDATA:SELECTED 532;CB 536;Y0 536;CR 536;Y1 536  
C–20  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital Waveform and Digital List Commands  
DGTL:REGion? (WFM 601M Only)  
Returns the region of the video signal where the data cursor is located. Possible  
regions include active picture, horizontal blanking, and vertical blanking.  
Syntax  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
DGTL:REGION?  
None  
dgtl:region?  
:DGTL:REGION ACTIVE  
DGTL:DATA? (WFM 601M Only)  
DGTL:DATA:V#?  
NOTE. The values displayed when using this command are accurate only when  
the waveform monitor is in the Data List mode.  
DGTL:DATA? returns 15 data samples centered on the currently selected sample  
(see LINESelect: commands on page C–42). This region data corresponds to the  
data seen on the Digital Video display.  
DGTL:DATA:V#? returns only the numbered sample from the 15 displayed,  
counting from the top down. Sample 7 is always the sample selected by the data  
cursor. This sample corresponds to V7 on the display.  
Change the display mode to Digital List using the DISPlay:SINGLE <display  
mode> command (page C–25) before using this command.  
C–21  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital Waveform and Digital List Commands  
Syntax  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
DGTL:DATA?  
DGTL:DATA:V#?  
Include the letter V followed by an integer (0–14) for the line number (#)  
argument.  
disp:single:dlist  
dgtl:data:v7?  
dgtl:data:v7?  
:DGTL:DATA:V7 536  
DGTL:VDATA? (WFM 601M Only)  
NOTE. The values displayed when using this command are accurate only when  
the waveform monitor is in the Digital Waveform mode.  
Returns the four demultiplexed data samples grouped with the currently selected  
sample (see LINESelect: commands on page C–42) The returned data corre-  
sponds to the data group containing the data cursor on the Digital Video display.  
Change the display mode to Digital Waveform (DISP:SINGLE DWFM on  
page C–25) before using this command.  
Syntax  
Arguments  
Examples  
DGTL:VDATA?  
None  
disp:single:dwfm  
dgtl:vdata?  
Returns  
dgtl:vdata?  
:DGTL:VDATA:SELECTED 536;CB 536;Y0 536;CR 536;Y1 536  
C–22  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital Waveform and Digital List Commands  
DGTL:VIDmode <VIDEO | DATA> (WFM 601M Only)  
Selects whether to display the raw data as a linear data sequence or as groups of  
four color difference values as they appear in the demultiplexed data: Cb, Y, Cr  
Y.  
Syntax  
DGTL:VIDmode <VIDEO | DATA>  
DGTL[:VIDmode]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<VIDEO | DATA>  
dgtl:video video  
dgtl:vid?  
:DGTL:VIDMODE VIDEO  
DGTL:FReeze <ON | OFF> (WFM 601M Only)  
Selects between viewing frozen data (ON) or active data (OFF) on the Digital  
List display. Freeze the data to study transient events.  
Syntax  
DGTL:FREEZE <ON | OFF>  
DGTL[:FREEZE]  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<ON | OFF>  
dgtl:freeze on  
dgtl:fr?  
:DGTL:FREEZE ON  
C–23  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital Waveform and Digital List Commands  
DGTL:BASE <HEX | DECIMAL | BINARY> (WFM 601M Only)  
Displays the sample values in hexadecimal, binary or decimal format on the  
Digital List display.  
Syntax  
DGTL:BASE <HEX | DECIMAL | BINARY>  
DGTL[:BASE]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<HEX | DECIMAL | BINARY>  
dgtl:base hex  
dgtl:base?  
:DGTL:BASE HEX  
C–24  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Commands  
Display Commands  
The commands in this section allow you to select and set parameters for the  
display modes of the waveform monitor. You must use the VECtor:GRATicule  
and GAMut:GRATicule commands to select one of the two modes for the Vector  
and Gamut displays.  
DISPlay:SINGLE <display mode>  
Sets the display mode to one of those described in Table C–6. The table lists the  
mode each command invokes and indicates some of the commands described  
elsewhere in this section that relate to the command.  
NOTE. The DISPlay:SINGLE:<display mode> command elicits no response  
when the waveform monitor is in the Multiple mode. You must first enter the  
Single display mode by disabling the Multiple mode from the waveform monitor,  
or by using the complete command string DISP:SINGLE <display mode>.  
Syntax  
DISPlay:SINGLE <display mode>  
DISPlay[:SINGLE]?  
Arguments  
<display mode>  
Table C–6: DISPLay:SINGLE commands  
<display mode>  
Selects  
Remarks  
WFM  
Waveform  
Use the command INPUT:SOU to select the A or B  
inputs, and use INPUT:CHA to select which of the  
RGB or YPbPr channels to display (page C–38).  
VECtor  
EYe  
Vector or Lightning  
Eye  
Use the command VECTor:GRATicule to select the  
Lightning or Vector display (page C–11).  
For the WFM 601M, use the command EYe:DISP  
to select the Eye or EQEye display. Use the  
command EYe:MODE to select Overlay or 10 Eye  
mode. Use the command EYe:CLO to set the clock  
high-pass filter (page C–33).  
EQEYE  
JITter  
EQ Eye  
Jitter  
Use for the WFM 601E only.  
Use the JITter commands to set jitter measurement  
parameters (page C–40).  
C–25  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Commands  
Table C–6: DISPLay:SINGLE commands (cont.)  
<display mode>  
Selects  
Remarks  
PIX  
Picture  
Use the commands DISPlay:PIXB and  
DISPlay:PIXC to set the blackness and contrast  
levels (page C–28).  
GAMut  
Diamond | Arrowhead Use the command GAMut:GRAT to select the  
DIAmond or ARROW display (page C–8).  
BOWtie  
AUDIO  
Bowtie  
Audio  
Use the command GAIN:AUDIO (page C–35) to set  
the audio input gain level. Use the POS:<VERT |  
HORZ> commands to position the Audio display  
(page C–45).  
PARade  
DLIST  
Parade  
Use the command INPUT:SOU to select the A or B  
inputs and use INPUT:CHA to select which of the  
RGB or YPbPr channels to display (page C–38).  
Digital List  
Use the command DGTL:VID to select the Video or  
Data modes (page C–23). Use the command  
DGTL:FR to view frozen or active data (page  
C–23).  
DWFM  
Digital Waveform  
Examples  
display:single wfm  
disp:single ey  
Returns  
disp:single?  
:DISPLAY:SINGLE EYE  
DISPlay:INTENSITY:<display mode>:<line select mode> <intensity>  
The DISPlay:INTENSITY commands set the intensity of the <display mode> in  
the Normal, H1, or H15 Line Select modes. Intensity is an integer from –2047 to  
1700. Table C–7 describes the <display mode>, <lineselect mode>, and  
<intensity> options.  
Syntax  
DISPlay:INTENSITY:<display mode>:<line select mode> <intensity>  
DISPlay[:INTENSITY |  
:INTENSITY:<display mode> |  
:INTENSITY:<display mode>:<line select mode>]?  
Arguments  
:<display mode>:<line select mode> <intensity>  
C–26  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Commands  
Table C–7: DISPlay:INTENSITY command options  
<display mode>  
<line select mode>  
<intensity>  
1
1
1
1
WFM  
<NORMal | H1 | H15>  
<NORMal | H1 | H15>  
<NORMal | H1 | H15>  
<NORMal | H1 | H15>  
–2047 to 1700  
Sets the intensity of the Waveform display  
VEC  
–2047 to 1700  
–2047 to 1700  
–2047 to 1700  
Sets the intensity of the Vector display  
LTNG  
Sets the intensity of the Lightning display  
EYe  
Sets the intensity of the Eye display  
1
When REF mode is set to Internal, the displayed 1H and 15H intensities both use the  
15H intensity setting.  
Examples  
Returns  
disp:intensity:wfm:h1 1000  
display:intensity:wfm?  
:DISPLAY:INTENSITY:WFM:H1 1000  
DISPlay:INTENSITY:READ <intensity>  
Sets the intensity of the on-screen readout text. Intensity is an integer from  
–2047 to 1700.  
Syntax  
DISPLay:INTENSITY:READ <intensity>  
DISPLay[:INTENSITY | :INTENSITY:READ]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<intensity>  
displ:intensity:read 700  
display:intensity:read?  
:DISPLAY:INTENSITY:READ 700  
C–27  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Commands  
DISPlay:INTENSITY:AUDIO <intensity> (WFM 601A Only)  
Sets the intensity of the on screen readout text. Intensity is an integer from  
–2047 to 1700.  
Syntax  
DISPLay:INTENSITY:AUDIO <intensity>  
DISPLay[:INTENSITY | :INTENSITY:AUDIO]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<intensity>  
displ:intensity:audio 1000  
display:intensity:audio?  
:DISPLAY:INTENSITY:AUDIO 1000  
DISPlay:PIXC <contrast range>  
Sets the contrast in the Picture display. The contrast value is an integer from  
–170 (low) to –1200 (high). The median value (–685) provides good contrast.  
This setting corresponds to the CONTRAST adjustment available after pressing  
the CRT MENU button in the Picture display.  
Syntax  
DISPlay:PIXC <contrast range>  
DISPlay[:PIXC]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<contrast range>  
displ:pixc -700  
display:pixc?  
:DISPLAY:PIXCONTRAST -700  
DISPlay:PIXB <blackness range>  
Sets the blackness level of the Picture display. The blackness value is the level of  
the picture that is considered to be the darkest black. The upper limit is +300 and  
the lower limit is –300. A setting less than zero can produce a light picture,  
while settings greater than 100 can produce a dark picture. This setting corre-  
C–28  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Commands  
sponds to the BLACK LEVEL adjustment available when the CRT MENU  
button is pressed in the Picture display.  
Syntax  
DISPlay:PIXB <blackness range>  
DISPlay[:PIXB]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<blackness range>  
displ:pixb 100  
display:pixb?  
:DISPLAY:PIXBLACKNESS 100  
DISPlay:TRACEROT <tracerotate>  
Allows adjustment of trace rotation. The argument <tracerotate> is an integer  
from –2047 to +2047. The median value ( 0 ) represents a trace rotation angle of  
approximately 0 degrees. Each extreme value rotates the trace by about 15  
degrees.  
Syntax  
DISPlay:TRACEROTate <tracerotate>  
DISPlay[:TRACEROTate]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<tracerotate>  
disp:tracerot –100  
display:tracerot?  
:DISPLAY:TRACEROTATE –100  
DISPlay:SCALEillum <scale>  
Adjusts the brightness level of the permanent scale on the CRT. The brightest  
value for the argument <scale> is 0 and the lowest is –2047. The best value  
depends on the brightness of the environment.  
Syntax  
DISPlay:SCALEillum <scale>  
DISPlay[:SCALEillum]?  
C–29  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Commands  
Arguments  
<scale>  
Examples  
Returns  
disp:scale –100  
display:scale?  
:DISPLAY:SCALEILLUM –100  
DISPlay:FOCUS:<line select mode> <range>  
Adjusts the CRT focus for different Line Select modes. The <range> for all of  
the FOCUS settings is –2047 to +2047. Table C–8 describes the command  
options.  
Use this command to set the focus for displays using Normal, H1 or H15 LINE  
SELECT modes.  
Syntax  
DISPLAY:FOCUS:<line select mode> <range>  
DISPLAY[:FOCUS | :FOCUS:<line select mode>]?  
Arguments  
:<line select mode> <range>  
Table C–8: DISPLay:FOCUS command options  
:<line select mode>  
Selects  
<range>  
NORMAL  
See the command LINES:MODE.  
Line select off  
–2047 to +2047.  
H1  
H1  
–2047 to +2047.  
–2047 to +2047.  
H15  
H15  
Examples  
Returns  
DISPLAY:FOCUS:H1 2047  
disp:focus:norm 100  
display:focus?  
:DISPLAY:FOCUS:NORMAL 100;H1 2047;H15 2047  
C–30  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Commands  
Error Commands  
The waveform monitor detects errors and records error messages in an error  
message buffer. To determine whether an error has been recorded, send the query  
ESR?. If an error has been detected, the waveform monitor will respond with a  
message similar to :ESR 32. To get more information about the error, send the  
query ALLEV?. The response to the ALLEV? query will be similar to one of the  
error message types described in Table C–9.  
ESR?  
This query determines if the waveform monitor has recorded any command  
errors. If ESR? returns an error, use the ALLEV? query to determine the type of  
error recorded. Table C–9 describes possible error messages displayed by the  
waveform monitor.  
Syntax  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
ESR?  
None  
esr?  
esr?  
:ESR 32  
See Table C–9 for a list of possible command error reports returned by the  
ALLEV? query.  
ALLEV?  
This query is used to determine the type of command error reported by the  
waveform monitor. Table C–9 describes a list of possible error messages returned  
by ALLEV?. To use ALLEV?, query using ESR? to determine whether the  
waveform monitor has recorded any command errors. If an error was detected,  
use ALLEV? to help you determine the possible cause of the error.  
C–31  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Commands  
The error messages displayed consist of three parts:  
H
H
H
An ALLEV response number  
A description of the error type  
A record of the command string in which the error was detected  
The description of the error type and the record of the command string are  
enclosed in quotes. Multiple error messages are separated by a comma and an  
ALLEV response number.  
Syntax  
ALLEV?  
Arguments  
None  
Table C–9: Typical ALLEV? responses to detected system errors.  
ALLEV? report  
Remarks  
:ALLEV 0,”No events to report –  
queue empty”  
No errors to report in the error message buffer.  
:ALLEV 100,”Command error;  
command not allowed – vc:differ-  
ence 1000”  
This error message is typical of invalid commands or  
arguments; for instance, a misspelled or disallowed  
command.  
:ALLEV 102,”Syntax error; invalid  
character data – arrow:limit:ntsc  
ire_133\0A”  
This error message is typical of invalid arguments.  
:ALLEV 103,”Invalid separator; illegal This error message is typical of invalid characters in the  
use of alias – disp:pixb  
argument of a command.  
298990–909009\0A  
:ALLEV 104,”Data type error; invalid This message is typical of invalid data types in the  
character data – n:ltng:var:vert:value argument of a command; for instance, ASCII characters  
ON\0A”  
where an integer value is expected.  
:ALLEV 113,”Undefined header;  
unrecognized command –  
gain:vec:var:horz:”  
This message is typical of incorrect command strings;  
for instance commands sent without an argument.  
Examples  
Returns  
gain:ltng:var:vert:value ON (this is an invalid command)  
esr?  
:ESR 32  
allev?  
:ALLEV 104,”Data type error; invalid character data–n:var:vert:value ON\0A”  
See Table C–9 for additional examples.  
C–32  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Eye Pattern Commands  
Eye Pattern Commands  
The commands in this section allow you to select either the Eye or EQEye  
displays and to toggle between the Overlay and 10 Eye modes. Use the  
command DISPlay:SINGLE:EYe to enable the Eye display.  
EYe:DISPlay < FLAT | EQEYE> (WFM 601M Only)  
Selects either the Flat (or raw) digital data stream or an Equalized data stream for  
the Eye display. The Flat mode corresponds to the EYE bezel button selection in  
the Eye display mode. The EQEYE mode compensates for cable loss in a long  
cable by applying receiver equalization to the signal.  
Syntax  
EYe:DISPlay <FLAT | EQEYE>  
EYe[:DISPlay]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<FLAT | EQEYE>  
ey:disp eqeye  
eye:disp?  
:EYE:DISPLAY EQEYE  
EYe:MODE <OVERLAY | EYE10> (WFM 601E and WFM 601M Only)  
Selects the trigger mode for the Eye display. OVERLAY displays three eyes and  
EYE10 displays 10 eyes.  
Syntax  
EYe:MODE <OVERLAY | EYE10>  
EYe[:MODE]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<OVERLAY | EYE10>  
eye:mode eye10  
eye:mode?  
:EYE:MODE EYE10  
C–33  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Eye Pattern Commands  
EYe:CLOckhpf <E10HZ | E100HZ | E1000HZ>(WFM 601E and WFM 601M Only)  
Selects between high-pass filters 10, 100, or 1000 Hz to suppress low-frequency  
jitter while in the Eye display mode.  
Syntax  
EYe:CLOckhpf <E10HZ | E100HZ | E1000HZ>  
EYe[:CLOckhpf]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<E10HZ | E100HZ | E1000HZ>  
eye:clo e1000hz  
eye?  
:EYE:DISPLAY EQEYE;MODE EYE10;CLOCKHPF E1000HZ (WFM 601M)  
:EYE:MODE EYE10;CLOCKHPF E1000HZ (WFM 601E)  
C–34  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Gain Commands  
Gain Commands  
The commands in this section allow you to select fixed gain levels or set variable  
gain levels for the Waveform, Vector, and Lightning displays.  
GAIN:AUDIO <DBU0 | DBU4 | DBU8 | DBU12> (WFM 601A Only)  
Sets the gain level of the analog audio input to the desired level and scales the  
electronic graticule accordingly.  
Syntax  
GAIN:AUDIO <DBU0 | DBU4 | DBU8 | DBU12>  
GAIN[:AUDIO]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<DBU0 | DBU4 | DBU8 | DBU12>  
gain:audio dbu0  
gain:audio?  
:GAIN:AUDIO 0  
GAIN:W_V_STATE <x1 | x5 | x10>  
Sets the fixed vertical gain of the Waveform display to X1, X5 or X10. Gain is  
selectable in the GAIN menu.  
Syntax  
GAIN:W_V_STATE <x1 | x5 | x10>  
GAIN[:W_V_STATE]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<x1 | x5 | x10>  
gain:w_v_state x5  
gain:w_v_state?  
:GAIN:W_V_STATE X5  
C–35  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Gain Commands  
GAIN:<WFM | VEC>:VAR:STATE <ON | OFF>  
Sets variable vertical gain ON or OFF for the Waveform or the Vector displays.  
Variable gain is selectable in the GAIN menu.  
Syntax  
GAIN:<WFM | VEC>:VAR:STATE <ON | OFF>  
GAIN[:<WFM | VEC>:VAR:STATE]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<WFM | VEC> and <ON | OFF>  
gain:wfm:var:state on  
gain:wfm:var:state?  
:GAIN:WFM:VARIABLE:STATE ON  
GAIN:<WFM | VEC>:VAR:VALUE <gain>  
Sets the value of variable <gain> for the Waveform or Vector display to an  
integer value. The minimum value of <gain> is 200 and the maximum value is  
3000.  
Syntax  
GAIN:<WFM | VEC>:VAR:VALUE <gain>  
GAIN:<WFM | VEC>:VAR:VALUE?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<WFM | VEC> and <gain>  
gain:vec:var:value 950  
gain:vec:var?  
:GAIN:VECTOR:VARIABLE:STATE ON;VALUE 950  
C–36  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Gain Commands  
GAIN:LTNG:VAR:<VERT | HORZ>:STATE <ON | OFF>  
Sets the variable vertical or horizontal gain ON or OFF for the Lightning display.  
Syntax  
GAIN:LTNG:VAR:<VERT | HORZ>:STATE <ON | OFF>  
GAIN:LTNG:VAR:<VERT | HORZ>:STATE?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<VERT | HORZ> and <ON | OFF>  
gain:ltng:var:horz:state on  
gain:ltng:var:horz:state?  
:GAIN:LTNG:VAR:HORZ:STATE ON  
gain:ltng:var:horz?  
:GAIN:LTNG:VAR:HORZ:STATE ON;VALUE 750  
GAIN:LTNG:VAR:<VERT | HORZ>:VALUE <gain>  
Sets the value of the variable vertical or horizontal gain for the Lightning display  
to an integer value between 200 (minimum) and 3000 (maximum).  
Syntax  
GAIN:LTNG:VAR:<VERT | HORZ>:VALUE <gain>  
GAIN:LTNG:VAR<VERT | HORZ>:VALUE?  
Arguments  
Examples  
<VERT | HORZ> and <gain>  
gain:ltng:var:vert:state on  
gain:ltng:var:vert:value 2000  
Returns  
gain:ltng:var:vert?  
:GAIN:LTNG:VAR:VERT: STATE ON;VALUE 2000  
C–37  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Input Commands  
Input Commands  
The commands in this section allow you to make the following changes to the  
waveform monitor:  
H
H
H
Select an input signal source  
Select which channel or channels to display  
Set the offset level for the Pb and Pr channels of the input signal  
INput:SOUrce <SERIALA | SERIALB>  
Selects the signal for display from the A or B rear-panel, loop-through inputs.  
Syntax  
INput:SOUrce <SERIALA | SERIALB>  
INput[:SOUrce]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<SERIALA | SERIALB>  
in:sou seriala  
input:sou?  
:INPUT:SOURCE SERIALA  
C–38  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Input Commands  
INput:CHANnel <CH1 | CH2 | CH3>  
Selects the component YPbPr or RGB channel to display in Waveform and  
Parade displays. The channel mapping is CH1 (Y/R), CH2 (Pb/G), CH3 (Pr/B)  
and any combination of the three channels can be displayed at one time by  
separating the channel options with commas.  
Syntax  
INput:CHANnel <CH1 | CH2 | CH3>  
INput[:CHANnel]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<CH1 | CH2 | CH3>  
input:chan ch1,ch2  
in:chan?  
:INPUT:CHANNEL CH1,CH2  
INput:PBPROFFSet <MV_0 | MV_350>  
Sets the offset for the Pb and Pr channels to either 0 mv or 350 mv.  
Syntax  
INput:PBPROFFSet <MV_0 | MV_350>  
INput[:PBPROFFSet]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<MV_0 | MV_350>  
input:pbproffset mv_0  
in?  
:INPUT:SOURCE SERIALA; CHANNEL CH1,CH2; PBPROFFSET MV_0  
C–39  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Jitter Measurement Commands  
Jitter Measurement Commands  
The commands in this section allow you to change parameters for the Jitter  
measurement display.  
JITter:HPFILter <J10HZ | J1000HZ | J10KHZ | J100KHZ> (WFM 601M Only)  
Selects the high-pass filter frequency for the Jitter measurement display.  
This setting corresponds to the Jitter HPF selection in the Config Jitter menu.  
Syntax  
JITter:HPFILter <J10HZ | J1000HZ | J10KHZ | J100KHZ>  
JITter[:HPFILter]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
<J10HZ | J1000HZ | J10KHZ | J100KHZ>  
jit:hpfilter j1000hz  
jit:hpfil j10khz  
Returns  
jit?  
:JITTER:HPFILTER J10KHZ;UNITS UI;ALIGNMENT 0.11 UI;TIMING 0.10  
UI  
JITter:UNITS <SEC | UI | OFF> (WFM 601M Only)  
Selects the units for the readout of jitter magnitude.  
Syntax  
JITter:UNITS <SEC | UI | OFF>  
JITter[:UNITS]?  
<SEC | UI | OFF>  
jit:units OFF  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
jit:units?  
:JITTER:UNITS OFF  
C–40  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Jitter Measurement Commands  
JITter:<ALIGNMENT | TIMING >? (WFM 601M Only)  
Independently queries the magnitude of the jitter components. The TIMING  
measurement is the raw jitter and the ALIGNMENT is the jitter remaining after  
the high-pass filter (JIT:HPFIL). Use the command JIT:UNITS to pick the units  
of measure.  
Syntax  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
JITter:<ALIGNMENT | TIMING >?  
<ALIGNMENT | TIMING >  
jit:timing?  
jit:timing?  
:JITTER:TIMING 0.10 UI  
C–41  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Line Select Commands  
Line Select Commands  
The commands in this section allow you to select the part of the video signal you  
wish to display and measure. Use the command MENU LINESelect (page C–50)  
to enable the Line Select functions.  
LINESelect:<command> <options>  
Table C–10 describes the LINESelect: commands and the argument options  
associated with each command. These commands correspond to the selections  
available when you press the LINE SELECT button.  
Syntax  
LINESelect:<command> <options>  
LINESelect[:<command>]?  
Arguments  
:<command> <options>  
Table C–10: LINESelect: commands and options  
:<command> <options>  
Remarks  
MODE  
<ON | OFF>  
Selects whether the Line Select mode is ON or OFF.  
FMODE  
<ALL | TWO>  
Selects the mode that displays one line out of field 1  
or field 2 or the same line in both fields.  
FIELD  
<F1 | F2>  
Selects from which field the Line Select sample is  
chosen. Select the line with the command  
LINES:NUMBER and the sample with LINES:SMPL.  
DISP  
<H1 | H15 | SAMPLE> Selects the Line Select mode from single line (H1) or  
a range of 15 lines or a single sample within a line.  
NUMBER  
<line number>  
Selects a particular horizontal line for Line Select.  
Select the field using the command LINES:FIELD  
and the sample using LINES:SMPL.  
SMPL  
<sample>  
For the WFM 601M, selects a particular sample on a  
horizontal line for Line Select. Select the line with  
the command LINES:NUMBER and the field with  
LINES:FIELD.  
C–42  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Line Select Commands  
Examples  
Returns  
lines:mode on  
lines?  
:LINESELECT:MODE ON;NUMBER 573;SMPL 741;FIELD F2;FMODE  
TWO;DISPLAY SAMPLE  
C–43  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Position Commands  
Position Commands  
The commands in this section allow you to position displays vertically and  
horizontally on the graticule.  
POSition:VERTical:<display mode> <range>  
POSition:HORZ:<display mode> <range>  
The POSition commands correspond to the bezel knobs that position the display  
vertically and horizontally. POSition:VERTical commands and options are listed  
in Table C–11. Table C–12 lists the POSition:HORZ (horizontal) commands and  
options.  
Acceptable values for the argument <range> for both the vertical and horizontal  
positioning commands are from –500 to 500. When queried, vertical = 0 and  
horizontal = 0 indicates that the display is centered.  
NOTE. For firmware versions V2.1 and below, to position the Lightning display  
using the remote commands, you must first put the waveform monitor into the  
Lightning display mode using the DISPlay:SINGLE VECtor (page C–25) and  
VECtor:GRATicule LTNG (page C–11) commands. Then use the VECtor display  
vertical and horizontal positioning commands listed in Tables C–11 and C–12.  
With V2.2 and above, positioning commands are effective without first selecting  
the Lightning display.  
Syntax  
POSITion:<VERTical | HORZ>:<display mode> <range>  
POSITion[:<VERTical | HORZ> |  
:<VERTical | HORZ>:<display mode>]?  
Arguments  
<display mode> <range>  
C–44  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Position Commands  
Table C–11: POSition:VERTical commands and options  
<display mode>  
<range>  
Remarks  
WFM | EYe | BOWtie –8188 to +8188  
Positions the named display vertically.  
Positions the Picture display vertically.  
Positions the Vector display vertically.  
Positions the Lightning display vertically.  
PIX  
–3120 to +966  
–500 to +500  
–500 to +500  
–2047 to +2047  
VECtor  
LTNG  
ARROWhead  
Positions the Arrowhead Gamut display  
vertically.  
DIAmond  
–2047 to +2047  
–250 to +250  
Positions the Diamond Gamut display vertically.  
Positions the Audio display vertically.  
AUDIO  
(WFM 601A only)  
Table C–12: POSition:HORZ commands and options  
<display mode>  
<range>  
Remarks  
WFM | EYe | BOWtie –12282 to +12282  
Positions the named display horizontally.  
Positions the Picture display horizontally.  
Positions the Vector display horizontally.  
Positions the Lightning display horizontally.  
PIX  
–2700 to +2700  
–500 to + 500  
–500 to +500  
VECtor  
LTNG  
ARROWhead  
–2047 to +2047  
Positions the Arrowhead Gamut display  
horizontally.  
DIAmond  
–2047 to +2047  
–330 to +330  
Positions the Diamond Gamut display horizon-  
tally.  
AUDIO  
Positions the Audio display horizontally.  
(WFM 601A only)  
Examples  
Returns  
pos:vertical:EYe 100  
pos:horz:eye?  
:POSITION:HORIZONTAL:EYE 0  
pos:vert:ey?  
:POSITION:VERTICAL:EYE 100  
C–45  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preset Commands  
Preset Commands  
The commands in this section allow you to select, store, and name parameter  
presets for the waveform monitor. Use the command UIMENU:PREset (page  
C–15) to enable the preset functions.  
PREset:REcall <PRESETn | FACTORY >  
Recalls the Preset stored in the named location. The preset function allows you  
to store up to ten front panel setups: Nine user defined presets and one factory  
preset. The factory preset is programmed to assist in calibrating the instrument.  
The letter n in the argument <PRESETn> represents a number between 1 and 9.  
Syntax  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
PREset:REcall <PRESETn | FACTORY >  
<PRESETn | FACTORY >  
preset:rec factory  
None  
PREset:STORE <PRESETn>  
Deletes the currently stored setting in the named memory location and replaces it  
with the current front panel settings. The letter n in the argument <PRESETn>  
represents a number between 1 and 9. (The waveform monitor can store 9 presets  
in addition to the FACTORY preset.)  
Syntax  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
PREset:STORE <PRESETn>  
<PRESETn>  
preset:store preset1  
None  
C–46  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preset Commands  
PREset:NAMES:<PRESETn> “any string”  
Sets the name of the specified Preset. The name is limited to ten alphanumeric  
characters.  
You can use the 25 pin REMOTE connector on the rear panel to save or recall  
Presets. The appropriate pin is grounded to select the front panel setup stored in  
that preset location. Grounding pin 25 with any one of the other preset pins  
stores the current front panel setup into that selected PRESET location. Refer to  
Appendix B for more information on using the REMOTE connector.  
Syntax  
Arguments  
Examples  
PREset:NAMES:<PRESETn> “any string”  
:<PRESETn> “any string”  
preset:names:preset5 “jit–meas”  
preset:names:preset1 “clock–meas”  
Returns  
None  
C–47  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sweep Commands  
Sweep Commands  
The commands in this section allow you to manipulate the sweep characteristics  
of the waveform monitor.  
SWEEP:TIMING <ONEL | TWOL | ONEF | TWOF>  
Sets the sweep rate to one line (5 msec/div), two line (10 msec/div), one field, or  
two fields for displays other than the Parade and Eye displays. This command is  
equivalent to pressing the LINE/FIELD button on the Front Panel which has four  
states: ONELINE, TWOLINE, ONEFIELD, and TWOFIELD. One and two field  
sweep modes do not display a time/div readout.  
To set the sweep rate for the Eye display and the Parade display when you are  
displaying multiple channels, see SWEEP:TIMING <ONEL | ONEF>.  
Syntax  
SWEEP:TIMING <ONEL | TWOL | ONEF | TWOF>  
SWEEP[:TIMING]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<ONEL | TWOL | ONEF | TWOF>  
sweep:timing twol  
sweep:timing?  
:SWEEP:TIMING TWOLINE  
C–48  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sweep Commands  
SWEEP:TIMING <ONEL | ONEF>  
When you display more than one channel at a time in the Parade display, the  
SWEEP:TIMING command toggles between one line (ONEL) and one field  
(ONEF). In the Eye mode, the <ONEL | ONEF> argument allows you to toggle  
between a 1 and 3 ns/div line sweep rate and a field rate sweep.  
To set the sweep rate for displays other than the Eye or multiple channel Parade  
displays see SWEEP:TIMING <ONEL | TWOL | ONEF | TWOF>.  
Syntax  
SWEEP:TIMING <ONEL | ONEF>  
SWEEP[:TIMING]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<ONEL | ONEF>  
sweep:timing onef  
sweep:timing?  
:SWEEP:TIMING ONEFIELD  
SWEEP:MAG <OFF | ON>  
Sets horizontal magnification ON or OFF.  
Syntax  
SWEEP:MAG <ON | OFF>  
SWEEP[:MAG]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<ON | OFF>  
sweep:mag off  
sweep?  
:SWEEP:TIMING ONEFIELD; MAGNIFY OFF  
C–49  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Commands  
System Commands  
Using the commands in this section you can make the following changes to the  
waveform monitor:  
H
H
H
Select menus needed to change various parameters of the waveform monitor  
Select an appropriate filter for the Waveform and Parade displays  
Enable and disable the AFC and ECHO functions, the readout alignment  
markers, and the internal calibration signal  
H
Access the serial number for the waveform monitor  
MENU <FILTer | CURsor | LINESelect | CONFIG | GAIN | CRT | CLear | SERial>  
Displays the named menu or clears the displayed menus. In the WFM and  
PARade displays, MENU:FILter displays the filters menu. In the Eye display, it  
indicates the filter in use at the top right corner of the screen.  
Syntax  
MENU <FILTer | CURsor | LINESelect | CONFIG |  
GAIN | CRT | CLear | SERial>  
MENU?  
Arguments  
Examples  
<FILTer | CURsor | LINESelect | CONFIG | GAIN | CRT | CLear | SERial>  
menu lines  
menu config  
menu ser  
menu cl  
Returns  
menu?  
:MENU CLEAR  
C–50  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Commands  
FILTer <FLAT | DIFF | LP>  
Selects a filter setting for the Waveform and Parade displays. Table C–13  
describes the options for this command.  
Syntax  
FILTer <FLAT | DIFF | LP>  
FILTer?  
Arguments  
<FLAT | DIFF | LP>  
Table C–13: FILTer command options  
Arguments  
Remarks  
FLAT  
Selects a flat filter (all pass) for the Waveform and Parade  
displays.  
DIFF  
LP  
Selects a differentiated step filter for the Waveform and Parade  
displays.  
Selects a 1 MHz low–pass filter for the Waveform and Parade  
displays.  
Examples  
Returns  
filt flat  
filt?  
:FILTER FLAT  
AFC <ON | OFF>  
Sets the Automatic Frequency Control Clock ON or OFF. When AFC is OFF  
the synchronization is DIRECT and when ON synchronization is from the AFC  
clock. AFC should be on except when large, low-frequency jitter is present in  
your system.  
Syntax  
AFC <ON | OFF>  
AFC?  
Arguments  
<ON | OFF>  
C–51  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Commands  
Examples  
Returns  
afc on  
afc?  
:AFC ON  
PORT:ECHO <ON | OFF>  
Enables the echo of remote commands to the controlling device through the  
remote interface port. Echo should be on when using a monitor program and off  
when using a test program to send commands and receive data.  
Syntax  
PORT:ECHO <ON | OFF>  
PORT[:ECHO]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<ON | OFF>  
PORT:echo OFF  
port:echo?  
:PORT:ECHO OFF  
ROTEST <ON | OFF>  
Sets the Readout alignment markers ON or OFF. When set to On, four cross-  
shaped markers appear on the display. Use the Rotate bezel knob to adjust the  
display to match the horizontal and vertical graticule lines.  
Syntax  
ROTEST <ON | OFF>  
ROTEST?  
Arguments  
Examples  
<ON | OFF>  
rotest off  
rotest on  
Returns  
rotest?  
:ROTEST ON  
C–52  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Commands  
SNID?  
Returns the waveform monitor serial number.  
Syntax  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
SNID?  
None  
snid?  
snid?  
:SNID B0123456  
CALSignal:ENable <OFF | ON>  
In Waveform display, turns ON/OFF the internal calibrator signal.  
Syntax  
CALSignal:ENable <OFF | ON>  
CALSignal[:ENable]?  
Arguments  
Examples  
Returns  
<OFF | ON>  
cals:en OFF  
cals?  
:CALSIGNAL:ENABLE OFF  
C–53  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Commands  
C–54  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Command Processing Code  
The following code ensures that the waveform monitor does not drop any  
characters during remote command operations. This procedure expects a  
character string to send and places to put two types of responses: expected and  
unexpected.  
/*  
* wfmto601.c  
*
* This module contains the processing functions required for a DOS or  
* Windows based PC to communicate effectively with the WFM601x family of  
* instruments. This code provides an example of the message buffering  
* required due to the lack of a hardware UART.  
*
*
* This module uses a DOS communications code library included as a part  
* of the book "C Asynch Manager" copyright 1991 Blaise Computing Inc,  
* 819 Bancroft Way, Berkeley, CA 94701.  
The library is freely  
* redistributable as part of the product when you purchase the book.  
* Aside from purchasing its products, Tektronix has no business  
* relationship with Blaise, and under no circumstances warrants this  
* software for use to any particular purpose. Use this code at your own risk.  
*/  
#include "asynch_1.h"  
#include <ctype.h>  
/*  
* ASYNC library constants  
*/  
#define IO_BUFSIZ  
#define OKAY  
2300  
0x600b  
/* Number of connection attempts to make to the instrument  
2
*/  
#define NUMBER_OF_RETRIES  
/*  
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Blaise Computing error code definitions (not a complete list):  
#define A_OK  
0
1
6
7
// Operation successful  
#define INV_PORT  
#define NO_PORT_FOUND  
#define OUT_Q_FULL  
#define IN_Q_EMPTY  
#define TIMEOUT  
#define CANCEL  
// Invalid or uninitialized port  
// Port not found at address  
// Output queue is filled  
10 // Input queue is empty  
12 // Timeout waiting for event  
13 // Wait event cancelled by user  
*/  
C–55  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Command Processing Code  
/*  
* Module WARNINGS (these warnings indicate bad communications or  
* invalid requests to the instrument)  
*/  
#define W_INVALID_RESP -1  
#define W_UNEXPEC_RESP -2  
/* Invalid response from instrument  
/* Unexpected response from instrument  
*/  
*/  
/* Local communications port  
static int comPort;  
*/  
/*  
* init601Port - Initialize the port to communicate with the WFM601x  
*
* This procedure connects the program to a COM port, attempts to open it,  
* and initialize communications with the instrument.  
It returns either  
* A_OK (0), or an error code value indicating the problem.  
*/  
int  
init601Port  
(
int  
desiredComPort /* The desired COM portĊfrom 1 to 4  
*/  
)
{
static unsigned char  
int  
ioBuf[IO_BUFSIZ];  
lStat, mStat;  
/* Buf used by IO lib  
/* Required status  
*/  
*/  
register int  
register int  
tryCounter;  
errCode;  
/* Count tries  
/* Keep error values  
*/  
*/  
/* Check arguments for sanity  
if ( desiredComPort < 1 || desiredComPort > 4 )  
return INV_PORT;  
*/  
/* Set the desired communications port  
comPort = desiredComPort;  
*/  
*/  
/* Repeatedly attempt to initialize and open serial port  
for (tryCounter = 0; tryCounter < NUMBER_OF_RETIRES; tryCounter++)  
{
/*  
* Initialize port protocol:  
* port #, 9600 Baud, no parity, no stop bits, 8 bit data  
*/  
errCode = init_a1(comPort, 7, 0, 0, 3, &lStat, &mStat);  
/*  
* If port initialized without error, open port and return  
*/  
if (errCode == OKAY)  
{
errCode = open_a1(comPort,  
sizeof(ioBuf) / 2, sizeof(ioBuf) / 2, 0, 0, ioBuf);  
C–56  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Command Processing Code  
if ( errCode == A_OK )  
{
/* Set remote XON/XOFF flow control  
*/  
(void) setop_a1(comPort, 6, 1);  
return A_OK;  
}
break;  
}
/*  
* Open and close port to reset it, and try to initialize  
* it again.  
*/  
(void)open_a1(comPort, sizeof(ioBuf)/2, sizeof(ioBuf)/2, 0, 0, ioBuf);  
close_a1 (comPort);  
}
/*  
* If we can't at least get an OK, the port is either  
* missing or busy.  
*/  
if ( tryCounter == NUMBER_OF_RETIRES)  
comPort = NO_PORT_FOUND;  
/* On error, unset the comPort and return  
*/  
comPort = 0;  
return errCode;  
}
/*  
* sendToWfm601 - Send data to an instrument from the WFM601x family  
*
* This is the central procedure in this module. It sends "portMsg"Ċa  
* newline terminated stringĊto the instrument. If the message is a query,  
* this procudure waits for the instrument to respond and places that response  
* in "expectedResp". If the instrument returns any data while the message is  
* being sent, this procedure stores that data in "unexpectedResp" and returns  
* W_UNEXPEC_RESP. Finally, a cancel callback is accepted to allow the user  
* to decide when to stop waiting; cancelFunc is periodically called, and if  
* it returns a non-zero value, the procedure immediately terminates (pass  
* NULL if you don't want to use this feature).  
*
* The response buffers should be at least 1024 chars in length, which is  
* the maximum length of an instrument response.  
*/  
int  
sendToWfm601  
(
char *portMsg,  
/* The newline terminated send message  
/* Buffer for expected responses  
/* Buffer for unexpected responses  
/* User cancel routine to stop waiting  
*/  
*/  
*/  
*/  
char *expectedResp,  
char *unexpectedResp,  
int (*cancelFunc)(void)  
)
{
C–57  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Command Processing Code  
register char  
char  
unsigned int  
sendChar;  
recvChar;  
portStatus;  
/* Char to send to the instrument  
/* Char received from the instrument  
/* Status of the serial port  
*/  
*/  
*/  
int  
char  
isQuery = 0;  
*baseUnexp;  
/* Set if portMsg is a query  
/* The base unexpected response  
*/  
*/  
register int  
int  
int  
libError;  
iq_size;  
iSendAttempt;  
/* Error code returned from library  
/* Unused return arg required by lib  
/* Counter to halt pgm after x retries  
*/  
*/  
*/  
/* Return invalid port when port has not been initialized  
if ( comPort == 0 )  
return INV_PORT;  
*/  
/* Set the base unexpected response pointer  
baseUnexp = unexpectedResp;  
*/  
*/  
*/  
*/  
/* Initialize the send attempt counter  
iSendAttempt = 0;  
/* Loop until we reach the end of string  
while ((sendChar = *portMsg) != '\0')  
{
/* Force character to be lower case  
if ( isupper(sendChar) )  
sendChar = tolower(sendChar);  
/* Send the current character to the instrument  
if ((libError = wrtch_a1 (comPort, sendChar)) != A_OK)  
return libError;  
*/  
/* Wait (up to 10 seconds) for char to be sent  
libError = drain_a1(2, 10 * 19, 0);  
*/  
*/  
/* Complain if char was not sent (bad cable?)  
if (libError != A_OK && libError != TIMEOUT)  
return libError;  
/* Record whether this is a query command  
if ( sendChar == '?' )  
isQuery = 1;  
*/  
/* Loop until all characters are sent  
for(;;)  
*/  
*/  
*/  
*/  
{
/* Wait up to 30 seconds for instrument response  
iwait_a1 (comPort, 30 * 19L, &portStatus, cancelFunc);  
/* Get the instrument echo character  
libError = rdch_a1(comPort, &recvChar, &iq_size, &portStatus);  
/* On any error (bad cable) return error  
if (libError != A_OK)  
{
C–58  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Command Processing Code  
/* If no character is present (i.e., no echo response)  
* then resend the dropped character. But if  
* number of retires has been exceeded, then bail out  
*/  
if (libError == IN_Q_EMPTY)  
{
if (iSendAttempt++ > NUMBER_OF_RETRIES )  
{
strcpy( expectedResp, "NADA");  
printf("\nNo Response");  
getch();  
return libError;  
}
break;  
}
else  
return libError;  
}
/* Everything is Fine  
if ( sendChar == recvChar )  
{
/* Advance the port message string  
portMsg++;  
*/  
*/  
/* now that we have a successful echo, reset the 'send attempt'  
* counter  
*/  
iSendAttempt = 0;  
if ( recvChar == '\n' )  
{
/* If this was a '\n', expect a trailing '\r'  
if ((libError = iwait_a1(comPort, 20 * 19L,  
&portStatus, cancelFunc)) != A_OK)  
return libError;  
*/  
*/  
*/  
*/  
/* Get the instrument echo character  
if ((libError = rdch_a1(comPort, &recvChar,  
&iq_size, &portStatus)) != A_OK)  
return libError;  
/* Check if we failed to get a trailing return  
if ( recvChar != '\r' )  
return W_INVALID_RESP;  
}
/* Break to send next character  
break;  
}
/*  
* Instrument returned an unrelated character. Record it.  
* Continue to resend this character.  
*/  
*unexpectedResp++ = recvChar;  
C–59  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Command Processing Code  
/* Break out of this loop and halt the program if  
* the max number of retries has been exceeded.  
*/  
if (iSendAttempt++ > NUMBER_OF_RETRIES)  
{
strcpy(expectedResp, "NADA");  
printf("\nUnrelated character returned");  
getch();  
return libError;  
}
}
/* end for(;;) character sending loop  
/* end while() port message sending loop  
*/  
*/  
}
/*  
* If this is a query, read the next line.  
* Wait forever until we get it.  
*/  
if ( isQuery )  
{
for (;;)  
{
/* Wait up to 20 seconds for instrument response  
*/  
*/  
*/  
if ( (libError = iwait_a1 (comPort, 20 * 19L,  
&portStatus, cancelFunc)) != A_OK)  
return libError;  
/* Get the instrument echo character  
if ( (libError =  
rdch_a1(comPort, expectedResp, &iq_size, &portStatus)) != A_OK)  
return libError;  
/* Advance if character read wasn't a return  
if ( *expectedResp != '\n' )  
expectedResp++;  
else  
{
/* It was... expect a trailing '\r'  
if ((libError =iwait_a1(comPort, 20 * 19L,  
&portStatus, cancelFunc)) != A_OK)  
return libError;  
*/  
*/  
*/  
/* Get the instrument echo character  
if ((libError =  
rdch_a1(comPort, &recvChar, &iq_size, &portStatus)) != A_OK)  
return libError;  
/* Check if we failed to get a trailing return  
if ( recvChar != '\r' )  
return W_INVALID_RESP;  
break;  
}
}
}
C–60  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Command Processing Code  
/* Terminate the string of chars received above  
*expectedResp = '\0';  
*/  
/* Return an unexpected warning if we got one fromthe instruemnt  
if ( unexpectedResp != baseUnexp )  
return W_UNEXPEC_RESP;  
*/  
return 0;  
}
C–61  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Command Processing Code  
C–62  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D: User Service  
This section describes preventive maintenance for the waveform monitor and  
how to replace graticule light bulbs. If the waveform monitor does not function  
properly, send it to a qualified service personnel or contact Tektronix for service.  
Cleaning or Replacing the Fan Filter  
To ensure adequate air flow, clean or replace the rear-panel fan filter regularly.  
The interval between filter cleaning or replacement is determined by the  
operating environment. In a dusty environment, check the filter monthly. The  
Accessories kit shipped with your waveform monitor contain several replace-  
ment filters.  
To clean or replace the filter, follow these steps:  
1. Turn off power to the waveform monitor.  
2. Carefully pull the fan cover housing off the fan. No screws attach the cover  
to the fan.  
3. Remove the filter from the fan cover.  
4. Wash the filter in a mild detergent solution, rinse thoroughly and dry. Place  
the clean, dry filter or a new filter in the fan cover.  
5. Replace the cover over the fan.  
Fuse Replacement  
The line fuse for this instrument is located inside the cabinet, under a protective  
shield. Do not attempt to replace this fuse. Contact a qualified service technician  
for assistance.  
D–1  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D: User Service  
Graticule Light Replacement  
The graticule is illuminated by small light bulbs located under the bezel that  
surrounds the CRT. You or a service person can replace these bulbs if they burn  
out. The Accessories kit shipped with your waveform monitor contain several  
replacement bulbs. Additional bulbs can be purchased from Tektronix or from  
local electronics distribution sources.  
Required Tools  
This procedure requires the following tools:  
H
H
H
1/16 inch Allen wrench  
Small, straight-blade screwdriver  
Tweezers with curved or serrated tips  
Procedure  
Follow these steps to replace a graticule light bulb:  
1. Turn off the Power switch and disconnect the AC line cord.  
2. Using the Allen wrench, loosen the set screws in the five knobs below the  
CRT; then remove the knobs.  
3. Insert a small, straight-blade screwdriver into the recessed area on the right  
or left side of the panel. Pry gently until the panel snaps out of the front-  
panel frame. See Figure D–1 for panel and recess locations.  
Recess  
Recess  
Remove this panel  
(shaded portion)  
Remove these five knobs  
Figure D–1: Graticule light bulb replacement  
D–2  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D: User Service  
CAUTION. Needle-nosed pliers are not recommended in the following step, as  
they are more likely to break a bulb.  
4. To remove a bulb, position the tweezer tips on the thin, flat portion of the  
bulb (close to the plastic socket). Carefully pull the bulb straight out.  
5. To install a new bulb, hold it with the tweezers on the flat portion, align the  
bulb leads with the socket, and push the bulb in until it snaps into place.  
6. Place the panel below the CRT, and press on both the right and left sides of  
the panel until it snaps into place.  
7. Replace the five knobs below the CRT and tighten the set screws.  
Cleaning  
Clean the dust from the outside of the waveform monitor with a soft, clean cloth  
or small brush. A brush is especially useful for removing dust from around the  
selector buttons, knobs, and connectors. Hardened dirt can be removed using a  
soft cloth, dampened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use abrasive  
cleaners.  
CAUTION. Do not allow water to get inside any enclosed assembly or component.  
Do not clean any plastic materials with benzene, toluene, xylene, acetone, or  
similar compounds, because they may damage the plastic.  
Clean the light filter and CRT face with a soft, lint-free cloth dampened in  
denatured alcohol. Do not use abrasive cleaners.  
Interior cleaning and maintenance should be performed only by qualified service  
personnel. Instructions for interior maintenance are provided in the Service  
manual.  
Replacing the CRT Filter  
A smoke-gray filter covers and protects the face of the CRT. If the filter becomes  
damaged, replace it by following these steps:  
1. Turn off the Power switch and disconnect the AC line cord.  
2. Using the Allen wrench, loosen the set screws in the five knobs below the  
CRT; then remove the knobs.  
D–3  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D: User Service  
3. Insert a small, straight-blade screwdriver into the recessed area on the right  
or left side of the panel. Pry gently until the panel snaps out of the front-  
panel frame. See D–1 for panel and recess location.  
4. Remove the two Torx screws that fasten the bezel to the waveform  
monitor.  
5. Grasp the bottom of the bezel and pull out and upward to remove the bezel  
from the instrument. Two hinges at the top of the bezel hold it in place. Once  
the bezel is at a 45° angle with the front panel, they disengage. Remove the  
damaged filter out the back of the bezel piece.  
6. Snap the new filter into place on the back side of the bezel. Position the  
ridged side of the filter towards the CRT.  
7. Replace the bezel and bezel screws. Tighten the screws. Be careful not to  
overtighten them.  
8. Place the panel below the CRT, and press on both the right and left sides of  
the panel until it snaps into place.  
9. Replace the five knobs below the CRT and tighten the set screws.  
D–4  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Accuracy  
The closeness of the indicated value to the true value.  
Bandwidth  
The range of frequencies over which signal amplitude remains constant  
(within some limit) as it is passed through a system.  
Baseband  
Refers to the composite video signal as it exists before modulating the  
picture carrier. Composite video distributed throughout a studio and used for  
recording is at baseband.  
Bowtie Display  
A display used to assess relative timing and gain through a three-channel  
component system.  
Color Difference Signals  
Signals used by color television systems to convey color information in such  
a way that the signals go to zero when there is no color in the picture. R–Y,  
B–Y, I, and Q are all color difference signals for the NTSC system; U and V  
are color difference signals for the PAL system. The component system color  
difference signal are Y, PB, PR as specified by SMPTE and CCIR standards.  
Color Gamut  
The area between minimum and maximum reproducible limits for elements  
of the color difference or RGB signals.  
Component Video  
Video which exists in the form of three separate signals, all of which are  
required in order to completely specify the color picture. For example, R, G,  
and B; or Y, RY, and B–Y.  
Composite Video  
A single video signal containing all of the necessary information to repro-  
duce a color picture. Created by adding quadrature amplitude modulated  
R–Y and B–Y to the luminance signal for NTSC systems or U and V to the  
luminance signal for PAL systems.  
CRC  
Cyclic Redundancy Code. A series of transmitted bits used to enhance the  
error detection capabilites of a system.  
dB (Decibel)  
A logarithmic unit used to describe signal ratios. For voltages, dB = 20 Log10  
(V1/V2).  
Glossary–1  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Diamond Display  
A simplified vector display for RGB signals that defines the valid gamut  
limits in the form of two diamonds.  
Distortion  
See harmonic distortion.  
EDH  
Error detection and handling. Supports the standard SMPTE RP-165, which  
proposes a technique for recognizing inaccuracies in the serial digital signal.  
Frame  
Contains all the information required for a complete picture. For interlaced  
scan systems, there are two fields in a frame.  
Gamma  
A measure that compares the contrast in the original and reproduced  
television picture. Since picture monitors have a nonlinear relationship  
between the input voltage and brightness, the signal must be correspondingly  
enhanced to nullify the nonlinear distortion. Gamma correction is always  
done at the source (camera) in television systems: the R, G, and B signals are  
converted to R1/V, G1/V, and B1/V. Values of about 2.2 are typically used for  
gamma.  
Gamut  
See Color Gamut.  
GBR  
See RGB.  
Graticule  
The scale which is used to quantify the displayed signal on a waveform  
monitor or vectorscope. Graticules may either be screened onto the faceplate  
of the CRT (internal graticule), or onto a piece of glass or plastic that fits in  
front of the CRT (external graticule). They can be electronically generated.  
Harmonic Distortion  
Signal distortion caused by non-linearities in a system. System non-lineari-  
ties produce multiples of a single frequency signal applied to the the system.  
Harmonic distortion is evident when a pure sine wave applied to a system  
produces harmonic content at multiples of the sine wave frequency at the  
output.  
Hue  
The property of color that allows us to distinguish between colors such as  
red, yellow, purple, etc.  
Lightning Display  
A display, for use with SMPTE specified color difference signals (Y, PB, PR),  
that plots the two color difference signals against luminance to create a  
display similar in appearance to a lightning bolt.  
Glossary–2  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Linear Distortion  
Refers to distortions which are independent of signal amplitude.  
Lissajous figure  
An X–Y plot in which the signals applied to both axes are sinusoidal  
functions. For a stable display the signals must be harmonics. Lissajous  
figures are useful for determining phase and harmonic relationships.  
LSB  
Least Significant Bit. The lowest weighted bit or signal line.  
Luminance  
The signal (Y) which represents brightness or the amount of light in the  
picture. Luminance is the only signal required for black and white pictures.  
For color systems, it is obtained as a weighted sum (Y = 0.3R + 0.59G +  
0.11B) of the R, G, and B signals.  
MSB  
Most Significant Bit. The highest weighted bit or signal line.  
Nonlinear Distortion  
Refers to distortions which are amplitude-dependent.  
NTSC  
National Television System Committee. The organization which developed  
the television standard currently in use in the United States, Canada, and  
Japan. Now generally used to refer to that standard.  
PAL  
Phase Alternate Line. Refers to one of the television systems used in Europe  
and many other parts of the world. The phase of one of the color difference  
signals alternates from line to line to help cancel out phase errors.  
Pb  
A color difference signal used in component video systems. It is derived by  
subtracting the B (blue) signal from Y.  
Pr  
A color difference signal used in component video systems. It is derived by  
subtracting the R (red) signal from Y.  
Receiver Equalization  
Refers to recovering the data signal after cable loss. The signal is boosted to  
its original standard amplitude.  
RF  
Radio Frequency. In television applications, RF generally refers to the  
television signal after the picture carrier modulation process.  
RGB  
Red, Green, and Blue. Also referred to as GBR in SMPTE specifications.  
The three primary colors used in color television’s additive color reproduc-  
Glossary–3  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
tion system. These are the three color signals generated by the camera and  
used by the picture monitor to produce a picture.  
R–Y  
One of the color difference signals obtained by subtracting luminance (Y)  
from the red camera signal.  
Saturation  
The property of color which relates to the amount of white light in the color.  
Highly saturated colors are vivid, while less saturated colors have more white  
mixed in and, therefore, appear pastel. For example, red is highly saturated,  
while pink is the same hue, but less saturated.  
In signal terms, saturation is determined by the ratio between luminance level  
and chrominance amplitude. It should be noted that a vectorscope does not  
display saturation; the length of the vectors represents chrominance  
amplitude. In order to verify that the saturation of the colors in a color bar  
signal is correct, you must check luminance amplitudes with a waveform  
monitor in addition to observing the vectors.  
Termination  
In order to accurately send a signal through a transmission line, there must be  
an impedance at the end which matches the impedance of the source and of  
the line itself. Amplitude errors and reflections will otherwise result. Video is  
a 75 W system, so a 75 W terminator must be put at the end of the signal path.  
U
V
The B–Y signal after a weighting factor of 0.493 has been applied. The  
weighting is necessary to reduce peak modulation in the composite signal.  
The R–Y signal after a weighting factor of 0.877 has been applied. The  
weighting is necessary to reduce peak modulation in the composite signal.  
Vectorscope  
A specialized oscilloscope which demodulates the video signal and presents  
a display of R–Y versus B–Y in NTSC systems (or V versus U in PAL  
systems). The angle and magnitude of the displayed vectors are respectively  
related to hue and saturation.  
Vertical Interval  
The synchronizing information that appears between fields and signals the  
picture monitor to return to the top of the screen to begin another vertical  
scan.  
Waveform Monitor  
A specialized oscilloscope that plots voltage versus time to evaluate  
television signals.  
Y
See Luminance.  
Glossary–4  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
1700F00, 1–3  
blank panel, 1–10  
A
Cable Length  
Aberrations, serial channel measurements, 3–23  
Accessories, 1–2  
measurement, 3–49  
measurement for firmware V1.X, 3–47  
Cable Screen, 3–49  
optional accessories, 1–3  
Options, 1–3  
CABLE TYPE  
standard (included), 1–2  
for firmware V1.X, 3–47  
serial format selection, 3–50  
CAL SIG, configuration menu, 3–12  
Calibrate  
Accuracy, Glossary–1  
Active PIC CRC Error, in Configure SER ALARM  
menu, 3–11  
AFC, synchronization selection, 3–11  
Air filter, part number, 1–2  
ALARM, 2–4  
CONFIG menu, 3–12  
gain, 3–12  
Calibration, 3–7  
Alarm  
horizontal gain, 3–7  
vertical gain, 3–7  
based on serial format checks, 3–44  
Gamut alarm, 3–33  
Calibrator, calibration signal, 1–2  
Certifications and Compliances, A–11  
Changed Since Reset, Serial format selection, 3–46  
Check, after shipment, 1–15  
Cleaning, the instrument, D–3  
Cleaning Fan Filter, D–1  
CLEAR MENU, 2–5  
Clock BW, in Configure EYE PATTERN menu, 3–10  
Color Bars, in Configure WFM/VEC menu, 3–9  
Command set, C–1  
ALARM DISP, in Configure GAMUT menu, 3–10  
Amplitude, serial channel measurements, 3–22  
Analog Audio, see Audio, 3–1  
ANC Checksum, Serial format checks, 3–49  
ANC Parity, Serial format checks, 3–48  
AP CRC, using to measure error rate, 3–51  
AP CRC ERR SEC, Serial format selection, 3–46  
Arrowhead Display  
composite gamut, 3–31  
NTSC and PAL graticules, 3–31  
setting format, 3–32  
Component video, Glossary–1  
Composite, setting Gamut alarm, 3–33  
Composite gamut  
Audio  
analog signals, 3–1  
checking, 3–32  
display, 3–1  
Diamond Display, 3–31  
Composite video, Glossary–1  
CONFIG menu, map of functions, 3–8, 3–9  
Configuration menu  
Calibrate CAL SIG, 3–12  
Calibrate GAIN CAL, 3–12  
Configure menu  
gain, 3–4  
graticule calibrations, 3–4  
Lissajous patterns, 3–1  
measuring phase error, 3–4  
Serial format selection, 3–46  
Audio display, 1–26, 2–3  
Automatic, format checks, 3–44  
Calibrate description, 3–12  
description, 3–8  
B
Eye Pattern description, 3–10  
Eye pattern filters, 3–19  
Format description, 3–11  
Gamut description, 3–10  
Jitter description, 3–10  
Bowtie Display, 3–5  
relative gain check, 3–6  
timing measurement, 3–6  
Buttons, functional overview, 2–2  
Jitter Display settings, 3–38  
map of functions, 3–9  
SER ARM description, 3–11  
WFM/VEC description, 3–9  
Connector  
C
Cabinetizing, 1–8  
Cabinets, 1–5  
compatibility, 1–14  
Index–1  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Remote, B–1  
RS232, B–1  
Digital Waveform, 3–16  
in Functional Check, 1–24  
output monitor signals, 3–17  
picking the data format, 3–16  
using Gain, 3–18  
Connectors, rear panel, 2–6  
Coprocessor code version, determining software version,  
3–12  
using Line Select, 3–18  
Video and Data modes, 3–16  
Direct, synchronization selection, 3–11  
Display  
CRC  
use in AP CRC measurements, 3–51  
use in EDH measurements, 3–50  
CRC value, in Serial format screen, 3–46  
Cross hair cursor, on picture monitor output, 3–39  
CRT  
Audio, 3–1  
Bowtie, 3–5  
Multiple, 3–41  
filter part number, 1–2  
Parade, 3–41  
filter replacement, D–3  
setting intensity, 3–12  
Cursor Menu, 3–13  
Serial format selection, 3–46  
serial format selection, 3–50  
setting intensity, 3–12  
Vector modes, 3–53  
Waveform, 3–58  
Cursors, 3–13  
Both selection, 3–13  
data cursor correlated, 3–39  
on MON OUT video, 3–39  
on picture monitor output, 3–39  
timing, 3–13  
timing Cursors with Magnification, 3–13  
using in Waveform display, 3–58  
using Markers, 3–13  
E
EAV–SAV, in Configure WFM/VEC menu, 3–9  
EDH, using to measure error rate, 3–50  
EDH DET, front panel indicator, 2–4  
Elapsed Time, Serial format selection, 3–46  
Electrical specifications, A–1  
Enclosure, cabinet selection, 1–5  
Environmental Characteristics, A–9  
EQ EYE, receiver equalization mode, 3–19  
Error rate  
using with Gain, 3–13  
voltage, 3–13  
D
Data  
AP CRC measurements, 3–51–3–53  
EDH measurements, 3–50–3–53  
measurements, 3–50–3–53  
Errored seconds  
full field, 3–46  
Serial format screen, 3–45  
EXT REF input, 2–7  
jitter measurement with Eye Pattern, 3–27  
mode in Digital List display, 3–14  
mode in Digital Waveform display, 3–16  
viewing with Digital List display, 3–14  
viewing with Digital Waveform display, 3–16  
Data Cursor  
correlation with Digital Waveform display, 3–16  
on Digital Waveform display, 3–17  
Data format  
External Reference Input, Loop–Through Inputs, 2–7  
Eye Display  
in Functional Check, 1–20  
reference discussion, 3–19  
EYE PATTERN, Configure menu, 3–10  
Eye Pattern  
for Digital List display, 3–15  
for Digital Waveform display, 3–16  
Data Range, Serial format checks, 3–48  
Diamond Display  
See also Eye Display  
checking RGB Gamut, 3–30  
construction of the diamond graticule, 3–29  
RGB gamut, 3–29  
10 Eye trigger mode, 3–21  
aberration measurement, 3–23  
amplitude measurement, 3–22  
Clock BW filter, 3–19  
DIFF, Filter menu selection, 3–27  
Digital List, 3–14  
Clock BW filters, 3–19  
Configure menu, 3–10  
EQ EYE mode, 3–19  
FLAT mode, 3–19  
Freeze/Update selection, 3–15  
Line Select interaction, 3–15  
picking the data format, 3–15  
Video and Data modes, 3–14  
Index–2  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
jitter measurement, 3–26  
measurements, 3–22  
SERIAL, 2–4  
SWEEP, 2–4  
Overlay trigger mode, 3–20  
rise time actual, 3–25  
rise time measurement, 3–24  
Trigger Modes, 3–20  
using bezel buttons, 2–4  
using bezel knobs, 2–4  
VIDEO IN, 2–4  
Front Panel Controls and Indicators, 2–1  
vertical gain, 3–21  
Full Field CRC Error, in Configure SER ALARM menu,  
word correlated behavior, 3–27  
3–11  
Full field CRC errored seconds, 3–46  
Functional Check, 1–15–1–26  
Audio display, 1–26  
Digital Waveform, 1–24  
Eye Display, 1–20  
F
F1 AP CRC Value, Serial format selection, 3–46  
F2 AP CRC Value, Serial format selection, 3–46  
Fan, filter part number, 1–2  
Fan filter, cleaning or replacing, D–1  
Features, product features, 1–1  
FF CRC ERR SEC, Serial format selection, 3–46  
Field  
Gamut displays, 1–23  
Jitter Display, 1–20  
procedure, 1–17  
required equipment, 1–15  
Vector Display, 1–21  
Functional Overview, 2–1  
ALARM, 2–4  
selecting, 3–39  
selecting one or two for display, 3–52  
Field Length, Serial format checks, 3–48  
15H Line Select mode, 3–39  
Filter  
Audio display, 2–3  
CLEAR MENU, 2–5  
DISPLAY buttons, 2–2  
EDH DET, 2–4  
Front Panel, 2–1  
LINE/FIELD button, 2–4  
MAG button, 2–4  
MENU, 2–4  
POWER, 2–5  
REF, 2–4  
SERIAL, 2–4  
fan filter part number, 1–2  
for Eye Pattern, 3–19  
for Parade Display, 3–27  
for Waveform Display, 3–27  
high pass for Jitter Display, 3–38  
Filter Menu, 3–27  
Firmware, determining software version, 3–12  
525/625 Lines, Serial format selection, 3–46  
FLAT, Filter menu selection, 3–27  
FLAT EYE, Eye Pattern mode, 3–19  
flesh tone indicator, 3–54  
FMT Error, in Configure SER ALARM menu, 3–11  
FORMAT, configuration menu, 3–11  
Format, serial status, 3–44  
Format Error, Serial format selection, 3–46  
Format Screen, 3–48  
SWEEP buttons, 2–4  
VIDEO IN button, 2–4  
Fuse  
fuse part number, 1–2  
replacing, D–1  
G
Freeze/Update, for Digital List display, 3–15  
Front panel  
Gain  
audio, 3–4  
ALARM indicator, 2–4  
calibration, 3–12  
Clear Menu, 2–5  
for Eye Pattern, 3–21  
DISPLAY buttons, 2–2  
menu, 3–28  
EDH DET indicator, 2–4  
LINE/FIELD, 2–4  
MAG, 2–4  
MENU, 2–4  
overview of functions, 2–1  
POWER, 2–5  
relative gain check with Bowtie display, 3–6  
using with Cursors, 3–13  
using with Digital Waveform display, 3–18  
Waveform display, 3–58  
GAIN CAL, configuration menu, 3–12  
GAMUT  
REF, 2–4  
saving settings, 3–43  
configure menu, 3–10  
in Configure GAMUT menu, 3–10  
Index–3  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Gamut Alarm, 3–33  
Gamut Check, in Configure GAMUT menu, 3–10  
Gamut display, 3–29  
repackaging for shipment, 1–10  
Instrument specifications, A–1  
Arrowhead Display, 3–31  
checking RGB gamut, 3–30  
composite Arrowhead Display, 3–31  
configure menu, 3–10  
J
Jitter  
configure menu, 3–10  
definition, 3–26  
demodulation, 3–38  
Diamond Display, 3–29  
in Functional Check, 1–23  
setting Gamut alarms, 3–33  
Glossary, Glossary–1  
serial channel measurements, 3–26  
using Line Select to limit measurement, 3–38  
viewing waveform, 3–37  
Jitter Display, 3–37  
Graticule  
2T Pulse to Bar measurement, 3–36  
Arrowhead NTSC and PAL, 3–31  
Audio display, 3–4  
for Vector Display, 3–54  
horizontal scale, 3–36  
Configure menu, 3–38  
configure menu, 3–10  
in Functional Check, 1–20  
Jitter HPF, in Configure JITTER menu, 3–10  
JITTER OUT, signal origin, 3–37  
internal, 3–34  
K-factor measurement, 3–35  
K-factor setup for measurement, 3–35  
light bulb part number, 1–2  
Lightning Display, 3–56  
K
line definition, 3–34  
vertical scale, 3–34  
waveform measurements, 3–34  
Graticule light bulbs, replacement procedure, D–2  
K-factor measurement  
graticule illustration, 3–35  
special graticule, 3–35  
using Gain with, 3–35  
H
L
Hardware installation, 1–5–1–11  
Harmonic distortion, Glossary–2  
Horiz Pos, using with MAG function, 3–36  
Horizontal gain, calibration, 3–7  
Horizontal scale, waveform graticule, 3–36  
Hue measurement, with Vector Display, 3–53  
Light bulb part number, 1–2  
Lightning Display, 3–55, Glossary–2  
creating from Pb, Pr, and Y, 3–55  
interchannel timing measurement, 3–57  
luminance gain measurement, 3–57  
PbPr gain measurement, 3–57  
Limit Cursors, for Gamut alarm, 3–32  
Limit Format, in Configure GAMUT menu, 3–10  
Line  
I
selecting individual, 3–39  
Incoming inspection procedure, 1–15  
Inputs  
selecting number of lines in sweep, 3–52  
Line Length, Serial format checks, 3–48  
Line Select, 3–39  
data cursor correlation, 3–39  
selecting fields, 3–39  
use with Digital Waveform display, 3–18  
Line/Field, Sweep, 2–4  
Lissajous, patterns, 3–1–3–3  
List, Digital List display, 3–14  
Loop-through inputs, 2–7  
LPASS, Filter menu selection, 3–27  
Luminance, Glossary–3  
rear panel, 2–7  
selecting SER A or B, 3–58  
Installation, 1–5–1–14  
accessory drawer, 1–10  
BNC connector compatibility, 1–14  
cabinet selection, 1–5  
connecting power, 1–11  
hardware, 1–5  
in a serial video system, 1–12  
installing in a rack, 1–9  
line termination, 1–13  
Index–4  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
shifting with Line Select, 3–39  
Multi-pin connectors, 2–7  
Multiple Display, 3–41  
M
MAG, using with Timing Cursors, 3–13  
Magnified, Sweep, 2–4  
Manual, Service part number, 1–3  
Manuals, related, xi  
Markers, using, 3–13  
N
Naming, Preset, 3–43  
NTSC  
Measurement  
amplitude with Vector Display, 3–54  
cable commands, C–3  
cable length, 3–49  
Arrowhead Gamut graticule, 3–31  
setting alarm cursor, 3–32  
cable length for firmware V1.X, 3–47  
cable loss, 3–49  
O
calculating actual rise time, 3–25  
Cursor measurements, 3–13  
error rate using AP CRC, 3–51  
error rate using EDH, 3–50  
Eye Pattern aberrations, 3–23–3–29  
Eye Pattern amplitude, 3–22–3–29  
Eye Pattern jitter, 3–26  
Optional Accessories, 1–3  
Options, 1–3  
Other ANC Data, Serial format selection, 3–46  
Output, setting monitor out, 3–11  
Outputs  
Jitter Out, 2–7  
MON OUT (Y/G - PB/B - PR/R), 2–7  
rear panel, 2–7  
Serial Out, 2–7  
Eye Pattern measurements, 3–22–3–29  
Eye Pattern rise time, 3–24–3–29  
graticule, 3–34  
Overlay, Eye Pattern trigger mode, 3–20  
interchannel timing with Lightning Display, 3–57  
Jitter Display, 3–37  
luminance gain with Lightning Display, 3–57  
observing word correlated behavior, 3–27  
PbPr gain with Lightning Display, 3–57  
phase error with Audio display, 3–4  
phase with Vector Display, 3–54  
serial data error rate, 3–50  
serial signal level for V1.X firmware, 3–47  
source signal level, 3–49  
P
Packaging, shipping carton, 1–10  
PAL  
Arrowhead Gamut graticule, 3–31  
setting alarm cursor, 3–32  
Parade Display, 3–41  
filter selection, 3–27  
PbPr  
vector timing with Vector Display, 3–55  
Measuring serial sources, 3–22–3–29  
Mechanical installation, 1–5  
MENU, buttons, 2–4  
Gain measurement with Lightning Display, 3–57  
plotted against Luminance, 3–55  
Vector Display, 3–53  
Menu, 1–2  
PBPR Offset, in Configure WFM/VEC menu, 3–9  
Performance requirements, Specifications, A–1  
Phase error, audio, 3–4  
Physical Characteristics, A–9  
Picture Display, 3–42  
CRT, 3–12  
Cursor, 3–13  
Filter, 3–27  
Gain, 3–28  
Line Select, 3–39  
Preset, 3–43  
use, 2–5  
with bezel buttons, 2–5  
Power  
AC requirements, 1–11  
requirements, 2–6  
POWER (Switch), 2–5  
Power connector, 2–6  
Power cord  
with bezel knobs, 2–5  
Menus, Using the Menus, 2–5  
Missing Video, in Configure SER ALARM menu, 3–11  
Mode, in Configure EYE PATTERN menu, 3–10  
MON OUT  
Option A1, 1–3  
Option A2, 1–3  
Option A3, 1–3  
Option A4, 1–3  
configuring as GBR or YPbPr, 3–11  
Format Configure menu, 3–11  
Index–5  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Option A5, 1–3  
options, 1–3  
CURsor:CONTROL, C–17  
CURsor:SELect, C–16  
DGTL? settings, C–20  
DGTL:BASE, C–24  
Power, connecting, 1–11  
PR to Y Timing, 3–57  
Preset, renaming, 3–43  
Preset Menu, 3–43  
Recall, 3–43  
DGTL:DATA?, C–21  
DGTL:FREEZE, C–23  
DGTL:REGion?, C–21  
DGTL:VDATA?, C–22  
DGTL:VIDmode, C–23  
Display positioning commands, C–44  
DISPlay:FOCUS:, C–30  
DISPlay:INTENSITY, C–26  
DISPlay:INTENSITY:READ, C–27, C–28  
DISPlay:PIXB, C–28  
Recover, 3–43  
Rename, 3–43  
Return, 3–43  
Store, 3–43  
Procedure, Functional Check, 1–17  
Product Description, 1–1  
DISPlay:PIXC, C–28  
R
DISPlay:SCALEillum, C–29  
DISPlay:SINGLE, C–25  
DISPlay:TRACEROT, C–29  
Errors messages, C–31  
ESR?, C–31  
EYe:CLOckhpf, C–34  
EYe:DISPlay, C–33  
EYe:MODE, C–33  
Rack Adaptor, 1–9  
Readout  
in Configure JITTER menu, 3–10  
setting brightness, 3–12  
Rear panel  
connectors, 2–6  
Jitter Out, 2–7  
FILTer, C–51  
loop-through inputs, 2–7  
MON OUT (Y/G - PB/B - PR/R), 2–7  
multi-pin connectors, 2–7  
outputs, 2–7  
power connector, 2–6  
Remote, 2–7  
GAIN:W_V_STATE, C–35  
GAMut:ALarm:DISPlay, C–9  
GAMut:ALarm:TRIGger, C–9  
GAMut:GRATicule, C–8  
INput:CHANnel, C–39  
INput:PBPROFFSet, C–39  
INput:SOUrce, C–38  
Jitter magnitude query, C–41  
JITter:HPFILter, C–40  
JITter:UNITS, C–40  
LINESelect commands, C–42  
Marker cursor control, C–17  
Menu selection commands, C–50  
NTSC or PAL setting, C–10  
PORT:ECHO, C–52  
PREset:NAMES, C–47  
PREset:REcall, C–46  
PREset:STORE, C–46  
REFErence:MODE, C–6  
ROTEST, C–52  
Serial number query, C–53  
SERial:ALarm, C–13  
SERial:DISPlay, C–12  
SERial:EAVSAV, C–13  
SERial:MENU, C–11  
RS-232 connector, 2–7  
Serial Out, 2–7  
Recall, Preset function, 3–43  
Recalling, Preset front panel settings, 3–43  
Recover, Preset function, 3–43  
Recovering from zero brightness readout, 3–12  
REF, setting reference mode, 3–44  
Reference, 3–1  
REF button, 2–4  
setting mode, 3–44  
Related manuals, xi  
REMOTE  
connector pin assignments, B–2  
description, B–1  
rear panel overview, 2–7  
Remote Commands, C–1  
AFC, C–51  
ALLEV?, C–31  
ARROWhead:FORMat, C–8  
ARROWhead:LIMIT:NTSC, C–7  
ARROWhead:LIMIT:PAL, C–7  
buffering code, C–55  
CALSignal:ENable, C–53  
SERial:MONitor, C–12  
SLM:CABle, C–3  
SLM:LENGTH?, C–5  
Index–6  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
SLM:LEVEL?, C–5  
amplitude, 3–22  
SLM:RCVR, C–4  
jitter, 3–26  
SLM:SOURCE?, C–4  
rise time, 3–24  
SWEEP:MAG, C–49  
SWEEP:TIMING, C–48  
word correlated behavior, 3–27  
Serial format, 3–44  
10/8 Bits, 3–46  
User Interface menu commands, C–14  
Variable GAIN state for Lightning display, C–37  
Variable GAIN state for the WFM and VEC displays,  
C–36  
Variable GAIN value for the Lightning display, C–37  
Variable GAIN value for WFM and VEC displays,  
C–36  
ANC Checksum, 3–49  
ANC Parity, 3–48  
AP CRC ERR SEC, 3–46  
APPROX CABLE LENGTH, 3–49  
Approximate Cable Length for firmware V1.X, 3–47  
Audio, 3–46  
CABLE screen, 3–49  
VECtor:BARS, C–10  
CABLE TYPE, 3–50  
VECtor:GRAT, C–11  
CABLE TYPE for firmware V1.X, 3–47  
Changed Since Reset, 3–46  
Data Range, 3–48  
Voltage and timing cursor positioning, C–18  
Voltage and timing cursor tracking, C–19  
Remote operation, B–1  
DISPLAY, 3–50  
Display, 3–46  
Rename, Preset function, 3–43  
Renaming, Preset, 3–43  
Elapsed Time, 3–46  
Repackaging for Shipment, 1–10  
Replacing  
F1 AP CRC Value, 3–46  
F2 AP CRC Value, 3–46  
FF CRC ERR SEC, 3–46  
Field Length, 3–48  
525/625 Lines, 3–46  
Format Error, 3–46  
fuse, D–1  
graticule light bulbs, D–2  
Reset, Serial format checks, 3–46  
Restoring, front panel settings from Preset, 3–43  
RGB, setting Gamut alarm, 3–33  
RGB gamut, Diamond Display, 3–29  
Rise time  
FORMAT screen, 3–48  
Line Length, 3–48  
Other ANC Data, 3–46  
RECEIVER POWER LEVEL, 3–49  
Reset, 3–46  
calculating actual, 3–25  
serial channel measurements, 3–24  
RS232  
SAV Placement, 3–48  
Serial Signal Level for firmware V1.X, 3–47  
Signal Present, 3–46  
connector pin assignments, B–1  
rear panel overview, 2–7  
SOURCE SIGNAL LEVEL, 3–49  
STATUS screen, 3–45  
STATUS screen for firmware V1.X, 3–47  
Stuck Bits, 3–46  
S
Safety Certification Compliance, A–10  
Safety Standards, A–10  
Serial readout screen  
Sample, selection using Line Select, 3–39  
SAV Placement, Serial format checks, 3–48  
SAV–EAV, in Configure WFM/VEC menu, 3–9  
Saving, front panel settings as Preset, 3–43  
Screen, filter part number, 1–2  
SER A/B inputs, 2–7  
SER ALARM, configuration menu, 3–11  
SERIAL, 2–4  
Serial A Input, Loop-through input, 2–7  
SERIAL A/SERIAL B, 2–4  
Cable, 3–49  
Format, 3–48  
Status, 3–45  
Status for firmware V1.X, 3–47  
Serial Signal Level, serial format for firmware V1.X,  
3–47  
Service manual, 1–3  
Settings, saving as Preset, 3–43  
1700F00 Cabinet, 1–6  
1700F02 Portable cabinet, 1–6  
1700F04 side-by-side rack mount assembly, 1–6  
75 ohm terminator, 1–2  
Shipping instrument, 1–10  
Serial Alarm, configure menu, 3–11  
Serial B input, Loop-through input, 2–7  
Serial channel measurements  
aberrations, 3–23  
Index–7  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Signal  
U
receiver power level, 3–49  
source signal level, 3–49  
Signal Present, Serial format selection, 3–46  
Software Version Number, 3–12  
Specifications, A–1  
User Service, D–1  
cleaning, D–3  
cleaning the fan filter, D–1  
replacing graticule light bulbs, D–2  
replacing the CRT filter, D–3  
replacing the fuse, D–1  
Using, Menus, 2–5  
Certifications and Compliances, A–11  
Electrical Specifications, A–1  
Environmental Characteristics, A–9  
Physical Characteristics, A–9  
Safety Certification Compliance, A–10  
Safety Standards, A–10  
V
STANDARD, Format configure menu, 3–11  
Standard (NTSC/PAL), Glossary–3  
Standard accessories, 1–2  
Standby mode, 1–11  
Status, automated serial format, 3–44  
Status Screen, 3–45  
Variable Gain, 3–28  
Vector Display, 3–53  
amplitude measurement, 3–54  
flesh tone indicator, 3–54  
graticule, 3–54  
how Pb and Pr create display, 3–53  
in Functional Check, 1–21  
Lightning Display, 3–55  
phase measurement, 3–54  
timing measurement, 3–55  
vector timing measurement, 3–55  
Vectorscope, Vector Display, 3–53  
Version, determining software version, 3–12  
Vertical  
Status Screen for firmware V1.X, 3–47  
Store, Preset function, 3–43  
Stuck Bits, Serial format selection, 3–46  
SWEEP  
Line/Field, 2–4  
MAG, 2–4  
Sweep, 3–52  
SYNC, Format configure menu, 3–11  
Sync reference, setting, 3–44  
Gain, 3–28  
gain calibration, 3–7  
Vertical scale, waveform graticule, 3–34  
Video  
T
10 Eye, Eye Pattern trigger mode, 3–21  
10/8 Bits, Serial format selection, 3–46  
Termination, line discussion, 1–13  
Terminator, 75 ohm part number, 1–2  
Time, readout on Serial format screen, 3–46  
Time per div  
mode in Digital List display, 3–14  
mode in Digital Waveform display, 3–16  
viewing with Picture Display, 3–42  
VIDEO IN, 2–4  
Serial Inputs, 3–58  
setting mode in Configuration menu, 3–58  
Voltage cursors, 3–13  
setting, 3–36  
setting with Sweep, 3–52  
Timing  
jitter measurement with Eye Pattern, 3–26  
measurement with Bowtie, 3–6  
Timing cursors, 3–13  
W
Waveform  
Digital Waveform display, 3–16  
jitter, 3–38  
Parade Display, 3–41  
viewing jitter, 3–37  
Trace  
intensity, 3–12  
rotation, 3–12  
selecting number of lines, 3–52  
Trigger  
modes for Eye Pattern display, 3–20  
Overlay mode for Eye Pattern, 3–20  
2T Pulse to Bar, special graticule, 3–36  
Waveform Display, 3–58  
filter selection, 3–27  
Waveform display, using Line Select, 3–58  
Waveform graticule  
Index–8  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
horizontal scale, 3–36  
Word rate trigger, 3–21  
vertical scale, 3–34  
WFM AS, in Configure WFM/VEC menu, 3–9  
WFM/VEC, configure menu, 3–9  
Word correlated behavior, serial channel measurements,  
3–27  
Y
YPbPr Parade, 3–41  
Index–9  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Index–10  
WFM 601A, WFM 601E & WFM 601M User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Tascam Printer P11 TAS User Manual
Teac Stereo System CD P650 User Manual
Techno Source Handheld Game System 30453A User Manual
Thiel Audio Products Speaker 12 Coherent User Manual
Toshiba Air Conditioner RAV SM1103UT E User Manual
Toto Indoor Furnishings TMT1HNCR User Manual
Tricity Bendix Clothes Dryer TM 210 W User Manual
ViewSonic Computer Monitor G510b User Manual
Viking Ventilation Hood DCIH360 User Manual
Vizio Blu ray Player VBR100 User Manual